B.E.Marine 2024 (3)

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY

REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B.E. MARINE ENGINEERING
PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):

Program educational objectives are broad statements that describe what graduates are expected to attain
within a few years after graduation. Program educational objectives are based on the needs of the
program’s constituencies.
Graduates will have the knowledge for the application of scientific principles, Mathematical
1 methods, technical and Innovative skills to perform analysis, application engineering, and system
or process development in Marine Industry.
Graduates will have the knowledge by engaging in continuous education and will have the ability
2 to function effectively as leaders on professional teams with ability to communicate effectively
using speaking, writing and presentation skills.
Graduates of the program are to have demonstrated the competent to carry out the Engineering
watch at sea and to maintain systems or processes and to direct, supervise, and make important
3
decisions regarding the design and engineering of problems based on engineering fundamentals
and modern technological tools.
Graduates will demonstrate a respect for professional, ethical and social and environmental
4
issues as well as a commitment to safety, quality and productivity.
Graduates will demonstrate disciplined way of working as a part of teams in multidisciplinary
5
projects or shipping companies so as to meet the National and International standards.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs):

PO# Graduate Attribute
Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
1 fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
2 engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
3
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
4 research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
5 modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
1
The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
6 assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions
7 in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for
sustainable development.
Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms
8
of the engineering practice.
Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader
9
in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective
10
reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions.
Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering
11 and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a
team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
12
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs):
In addition to POs, each program should have 3 to 4 PSOs. These statements are the outcomes of
a program which should make the students to realize the fact that, the knowledge and techniques learnt in
this course has a direct implication for the betterment of society and its sustainability.
1 The ability to have thorough knowledge of Maritime industry in accordance with the STCW-
conventions 2010 amendments made time-to-time.
2 Possess an overall and conscious understanding about Marine engineering at the operational
and management level
3 Possess knowledge of National and International rules and regulations concerning Marine
engineering
4 Possess the necessary skill for the technical operation of ships in both off-shore and on-shore.
PEO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PSO
P
E PO1 PO2 PO PO PO PO PO PO8 PO PO PO PO PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
O 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12
1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 3
2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3
4 1 2 2 1 3 3 3 3
5 1 1 1 3 3 3 3
Av 3/2=1 3/2=1 4/2 3/3 6/3 3/3 2/1 3/2=1 3/3 4/2 4/4 3/3 12/5= 13/5= 12/5= 13/5=
g .5 .5 =2 =1 =2 =1 =2 .5 =1 =2 =1 =1 2.4 2.6 2.4 2.6
2
Year Sem Course name PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1 2 3
Professional English- I 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3
Technical English for Marine Engineers - I 2.4 3 3 2.4 2.4 3 3 3 2.6 3 3 3 - - -
Mathematics for Marine Engineering – I 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
I Chemistry for Marine Engineering 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - -1.5 - - -
Problem Solving and Python Programming 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
I
தமிழர் மரபு/Heritage of Tamils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Technical English for Marine Engineers – II 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Mathematics for Marine Engineering – II 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Materials Science 3 2 1.6 1.4 1.8 1.2 1 1
II Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 2 1.8 1 1 2 1
Engineering Graphics 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / Tamils and - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Technology
Engineering Practices Laboratory 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 - - - - - 1
Laboratory
Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 1 1 - 1 2 - - - - - - - - - -
Marine Hydraulics and Fluid Machinery 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
III Strength of Materials for Marine Engineering 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
Marine Auxiliary Machinery 1.5 - - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
Ship Construction 1 - 1 2/2=1 1
Seamanship, Elementary Navigation and Survival 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 1
at Sea
Marine Electrical Machines 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - - 1
Marine Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
II Ship’s Fire Prevention and Control 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Marine Diesel Engines 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
IV Marine Boilers and Steam Engineering 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Environmental Sciences and Sustainability 1 1 - 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
V Marine Propulsion 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
VI Stability of Ships 1 1 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
III Ship Operational Management and IMO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Requirements
VII
Marine Vehicles Performance 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
Human Values and Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 1 1
3
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B. E. MARINE ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR I TO VIII SEMESTERS
SEMESTER I
Periods Total
Sl. Course Cate - Per Week
Course Title Contact Credits
No. code Gory
L T P Periods
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3101 Technical English for Marine Engineers - I I HSMC 4 0 0 4 4
3. MA3101 Mathematics for Marine Engineering – I BSC 4 0 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3101 Chemistry for Marine Engineering BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Problem Solving and Python
6. GE3151 ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
7. GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு/Heritage of Tamils HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
PRACTICAL
Problem Solving and Python
7 GE3171 ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8 BS3171 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BSC 0 0 4 4 2
TOTAL 18 0 8 26 22
SEMESTER – II
Periods Total
Sl. Course Cate - Per Week
No. code Gory
L T P Periods
THEORY
Technical English for Marine 4 0 0 4 4
1. HS3201 HSMC
Engineers – II
2. MA3201 Mathematics for Marine Engineering – II BSC 4 0 0 4 4
3. PH3251 Materials Science BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Basic Electrical and Electronics
4. BE3251 Engineering ESC 3 0 0 3 3
5. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
6. NCC Credit Course Level 1# - 2 0 0 2 2
GE3252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
7.
Tamils and Technology
PRACTICAL
8. GE3271 Engineering Practices Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Basic Electrical and Electronics
9. BE3271 Engineering Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
TOTAL 17 0 12 29 23
# NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
4
SEMESTER III
Periods Total
S. Course Cate Per Week
No. Code Gory
L T P Periods
THEORY
1. MA3351 Transforms and Partial
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Differential Equations
2. MV3301 Marine Hydraulics and Fluid
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Machinery
3. MV3302 Strength of Materials for
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Marine Engineering
4. MV3303 Marine Auxiliary Machinery PCC 4 0 0 4 4
5. MV3304 Ship Construction PCC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MV3305 Seamanship, Elementary
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Navigation and Survival at Sea
PRACTICALS
7. MV3311 Marine Hydraulics and Fluid 0 0 4 4
ESC 2
Machinery Laboratory
8. MV3312 Strength of Materials and 0 0 4 4
ESC 2
Applied Mechanics Laboratory
9. GE3361 Professional Development$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 19 1 10 30 25
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER IV
Periods Total
No. Code Gory
L T P Periods
THEORY
1. MV3401 Marine Electrical Machines ESC 3 1 0 4 4
2. MV3402 Marine Refrigeration and Air ESC
3 2 0 5 4
Conditioning
3. MV3403 Ship’s Fire Prevention and PCC
3 0 0 3 3
Control
4. MV3405 Marine Diesel Engines PCC 4 0 0 4 4
5. MV3406 Marine Boilers and Steam PCC
3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
6. GE3451 Environmental Sciences and
BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
8. MV3411 Welding Techniques, Lathe PCC
0 0 4 4 2
and Special Machine Shop
9. MV3412 Heat Engines, Boiler PCC
Chemistry and Refrigeration 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 18 3 8 29 24
# NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
5
SEMESTER V
Periods Total
No. Code Gory
L T P Periods
THEORY
1. MV3501 Marine Propulsion PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Professional Elective I PEC - - - - 3
3. Professional Elective II PEC - - - - 3
4. Professional Elective III PEC - - - - 3
5. Professional Elective IV PEC - - - - 3
6. Mandatory Course-I& Non-Credit
MC 3 0 0 3
Course
PRACTICALS
7. MV3511 Electrical Engineering,
Electronics and ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Microprocessor Laboratory
8. MV3512 Marine Machinery Drawing ESC 0 0 4 4 2
TOTAL 6 0 8 14 19
& Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MCI)
SEMESTER VI
Periods Total
S. Course Cate per week
No. Code Gory
L T P Periods
THEORY
1. MV3601 Stability of Ships PCC 4 0 0 4 4
2. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Professional Elective V PEC - - - - 3
4. Professional Elective VI PEC - - - - 3
5. Professional Elective VII PEC - - - - 3
6. Professional Elective VIII PEC - - - - 3
7. Non-Credit
Mandatory Course-II& MC
Course
8. NCC Credit Course Level 3# 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
9. MV3611 Fire Fighting, Controls and PCC
0 0 4 4 2
Simulator Laboratory
10. MV3612 Measurement and PCC
0 0 4 4 2
Instrumentation Laboratory
TOTAL 7 0 8 15 23
*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies

& Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MCII)
#NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded in the
Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
6
SEMESTER VII/VIII*
Periods Total
No. Code Gory
L T P Periods
THEORY
1. MV3701 Ship Operational
Management and IMO PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Requirements
2. MV3702 Marine Vehicles
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Performance
3. GE3791 Human Values and Ethics HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
4. Elective – Management # HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – III*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – IV*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
8. MV3711 Project Work EEC 0 0 0 6 3
TOTAL 20 0 0 26 23
*If students undergo “Marine Workshop Practical and Afloat Training”, in Semester VII, then the courses offered during
semester VII will be offered during semester VIII.
**Open Elective – II shall be chosen from the emerging technologies.
***Open Elective III and IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other Programmes)
#
Elective - Management shall be chosen from the elective Management courses
SEMESTER VIII/VII*
Sl. Course Contact Periods Per Week

Course Title Category C
No. Code Periods L T P
THEORY
8hrs per day – 6 days

a week, 24 weeks, 500
Marine Workshop Practical and
1. MV3811 EEC Marks. Sessional 18
Afloat Training
Marks 200 Report +
Viva 300
If students undergo “Marine Workshop Practical and Afloat Training”, in Semester VII, then the courses offered during
semester VII will be offered during semester VIII.
TOTAL CREDITS: 177
7
ELECTIVE – MANAGEMENT
PERIODS
TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE PERWEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. GE3751 Principles of HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. GE3752 Total Quality HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. GE3753 Engineering Economics HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
and Financial Accounting
4. GE3754 Human Resource HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. GE3755 Knowledge Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3792 Industrial Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
MANDATORY COURSES I*
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3081 Introduction to Women and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3 0
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3 0
4. MX3084 Disaster Risk Reduction MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Management
*Mandatory Courses are offered as Non-Credit courses
MANDATORY COURSES II*

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3085 Well Being with Traditional MC 3 0 0 3 0
Practices -Yoga, Ayurveda
and Siddha
2. MX3086 History of Science and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Technology in India
3. MX3087 Political and Economic MC 3 0 0 3 0
Thought for a Humane
Society
4. MX3088 State, Nation Building and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3 0
*Mandatory Courses are offered as Non-Credit courses
8
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES:VERTICALS
VERTICAL 1 VERTICAL 2 VERTICAL 3
DIVERSIFIED COURSES DIVERSIFIED COURSES DIVERSIFIED COURSES GROUP
GROUP 1 GROUP 2 3
Ship logistics and Management Mechanics of Marine Machines High Voltage Engineering
Marine Control Engineering and
English for Competitive Examination Marine Manufacturing Technology
Automation
Principles of Management Marine Engineering Materials Marine Electronics
Human Resource Management Marine Corrosion and Prevention Marine Robotics
Safety Precautions and Watch Keeping Marine Machinery and Systems Design Cyber Physical Systems
Ship Safety and Environmental Protection Special Duty Vessels and Type of Operation Autonomous Ships
Advanced Marine Heat Engines Marine Vehicles Underwater Vehicles
Marine Engineering Thermodynamics Fuel Cell Technologies Offshore Technology
.
Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:
Refer to the Regulations 2021, Clause 6.3. (Amended on 27.07.2023)
1
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES: VERTICALS
VERTICAL 1: DIVERSIFIED COURSES GROUP 1
Sl. Course Cate Periods Total

No. Code Course Title gory Per week contact Credits
L T P periods
1. MV3001 Ship logistics and Management PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. MV3002 English for Competitive Examination PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MV3003 Principles of Management # PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. MV3004 Human Resource Management # PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. MV3005 Safety Precautions and Watch Keeping PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MV3006 Ship Safety and Environmental PEC
3 0 0 3 3
Protection
7. MV3007 Advanced Marine Heat Engines PEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. MV3008 Marine Engineering Thermodynamics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
#
If the courses enrolled either in Professional Elective courses or Management Elective, the same
courses shall not be repeated.

No. Code Course Title gory Per week Contact Credits
L T P Periods
1. MV3009 Mechanics of Marine Machines PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. MV3010 Marine Manufacturing Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MV3011 Marine Engineering Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. MV3012 Marine Corrosion and Prevention PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. MV3013 Marine Machinery and Systems Design PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MV3014 Special Duty Vessels and Type of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Operation
7. MV3015 Marine Vehicles PEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. MV3016 Fuel Cell Technologies PEC 3 0 0 3 3

No. Code Course Title gory Per week Contact Credits
L T P Periods
1. MV3017 High Voltage Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. MV3018 Marine Control Engineering and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Automation
3. MV3019 Marine Electronics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. MV3020 Marine Robotics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. MV3021 Cyber Physical Systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MV3022 Autonomous Ships PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. MV3023 Underwater Vehicles PEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. MV3024 Offshore Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
OPEN ELECTIVES
(Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not
similar to any other course contents/title under other course categories).
OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II
(EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES)
To be offered other than Faculty of Information and Communication Engineering

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OCS351 Artificial Intelligence and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machine Learning
Fundamentals
2. OCS352 IoT Concepts and Applications OEC 2 0 2 4 3
3. OCS353 Data Science Fundamentals OEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS333 Augmented Reality /Virtual OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality
OPEN ELECTIVES – III

SL. CATE
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS351 English for Competitive OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Examinations
2. OMG352 NGOs and Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
3. OMG353 Democracy and Good OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
4. OCE353 Lean Concepts, Tools And OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Practices
5. CME365 Renewable Energy OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
6. OME354 Applied Design Thinking OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. OPR351 Sustainable Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. OSF351 Fire Safety Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
14. OML351 Introduction to non- OEC 3 0 0 3 3
destructive testing
15. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. ORA351 Foundation of Robotics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
17. OAE352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Aeronautical engineering
18. OGI351 Remote Sensing Concepts OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OAI351 Urban Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OEN351 Drinking Water Supply and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Treatment
21. OEE352 Electric Vehicle Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
22. OEI353 Introduction to PLC OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
23. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. OFD352 Traditional Indian Foods OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. OFD353 Introduction to food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
processing
27. OPY352 IPR for Pharma Industry OEC 3 0 0 3 3
28. OTT351 Basics of Textile Finishing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
29. OTT352 Industrial Engineering for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Garment Industry
30. OTT353 Basics of Textile Manufacture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
31. OPE351 Introduction to Petroleum OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Refining and Petrochemicals
32. CPE334 Energy Conservation and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
33. OPT351 Basics of Plastics Processing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
34. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OEC352 Fundamentals of Electronic OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Devices and Circuits
36. CBM348 Foundation Skills in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
integrated product
Development
37. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OMA353 Algebra and Number Theory OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OBT352 Basics of Microbial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
42. OBT353 Basics of Biomolecules OEC 3 0 0 3 3
43. OBT354 Fundamentals of Cell and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Molecular Biology
OPEN ELECTIVES – IV
SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. OMA355 Advanced Numerical Methods OEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. OMA357 Queuing and Reliability OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Modelling
5. OMG354 Production and Operations OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Entrepreneurs
6. OCE354 Basics of Integrated Water OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Resources Management
7. OMG355 Multivariate Data Analysis OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. CME343 New Product Development OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OME355 Industrial Design & Rapid OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Prototyping Techniques
11. MF3010 Micro and Precision OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
12. AU3002 Batteries and Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
system
13. AU3008 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
14. OMF354 Cost Management of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
15. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
17. OIM353 Production Planning and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
18. OIE353 Operations Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OSF353 Chemical Process Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
21. OML352 Electrical, Electronic and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Magnetic materials
22. OML353 Nanomaterials and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
applications
23. OMR352 Hydraulics and Pneumatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. ORA352 Concepts in Mobile Robots OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OGI352 Geographical Information OEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
28. OAI352 Agriculture Entrepreneurship OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
29. OEN352 Biodiversity Conservation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
30. OEE353 Introduction to control OEC 3 0 0 3 3
systems
31. OEI354 Introduction to Industrial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Automation Systems
32. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
33. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
34. OFD354 Fundamentals of Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
35. OFD355 Food safety and Quality OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Regulations
36. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
37. OTT354 Basics of Dyeing and Printing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. FT3201 Fibre Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OTT355 Garment Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
40. OPE353 Industrial Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OPE354 Unit Operations in Petro OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chemical Industries
42. OPT352 Plastic Materials for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
43. OPT353 Properties and Testing of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Plastics
44. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
45. CBM370 Wearable devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
46. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
47. OBT355 Biotechnology for Waste OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
48. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
49. OBT357 Biotechnology in Health Care OEC 3 0 0 3 3
B.E. MARINE ENGINEERING
Subject Area Credits per Semester Total

S.No
Credits
I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII
1 HSMC 5 5 5 15
2 BSC 12 7 4 2 25
3 ESC 5 11 10 8 4 38
4 PCC 10 14 3 8 6 41
5 PEC 12 12 24
6 OEC 3 9 12
7 EEC 1 3 18 25
Non-Credit
8 √ √
/(Mandatory)
Total 22 23 25 24 19 23 23 18 177
ENROLLMENT FOR B.E. / B. TECH. (HONOURS) / MINOR DEGREE (OPTIONAL)
A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for the
award of B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) or Minor.
For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.
For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester V
onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other programmes,
Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the following verticals
also.Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.
VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE (In addition to the all the verticals of other programmes)
VERTICAL IV
VERTICAL I VERTICAL III BUSINESS VERTICAL V
VERTICAL II
FINTECH AND PUBLIC DATA ENVIRONMENT AND
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
BLOCK CHAIN ADMINISTRATION ANALYTICS SUSTAINABILITY
Financial Foundations of Principles of Public Statistics for Sustainable

Management Entrepreneurship Administration Management infrastructure
Development
Fundamentals Team Building & Constitution of India Datamining for Sustainable Agriculture
of Investment Leadership Management Business and Environmental
for Business Intelligence Management
Banking, Creativity & Innovation Public Personnel Human Sustainable Bio

Financial in Entrepreneurship Administration Resource Materials
Services and Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Principles of Marketing Administrative Marketing and Materials for Energy
Blockchain and Management For Theories Social Media Sustainability
its Applications Business Web Analytics
Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation and Green Technology

Personal Management for Administrative Supply Chain
Finance and Entrepreneurs System Analytics
Payments
Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental Quality
Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Monitoring and Analysis
- - - - Integrated Energy
Planning for
Sustainable
Development
- - - - Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable
Development
(Choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other programmes
or from anyone of the following verticals)
VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

PERIODS
TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG331 Financial
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG332 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. CMG333 Banking, Financial
Services and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Insurance
4. CMG334 Introduction to
Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. CMG335 Fintech Personal
Finance and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fintech
VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG337 Foundations of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
2. CMG338 Team Building and
Leadership
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
3. CMG339 Creativity and
Innovation in PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
4. CMG340 Principles of
Marketing
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
5. CMG341 Human Resource
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. CMG342 Financing New
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures
VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG343 Principles of Public
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMG345 Public Personnel
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Theories
5. CMG347 Indian Administrative
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. CMG348 Public Policy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS
SL. CATE
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG349 Statistics for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG350 Datamining for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Intelligence
3. CMG351 Human Resource
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. CMG352 Marketing and Social
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. CMG353 Operation and
Supply Chain PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

SL. CATE
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CES331 Sustainable infrastructure
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. CES332 Sustainable Agriculture
and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CES334 Materials for Energy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CES336 Environmental Quality
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. CES337 Integrated Energy
Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. CES338 Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME
This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the institution.
Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.
The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:
“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of admission,
have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The graduating
student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she must also have
broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured as an essential
quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an engineer, a citizen
and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying values are needed.”
“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable, allow
them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them work for
excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students, give a
broader view of life, and build character. “
Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self, people
around them, society at large, and nature.
The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.
(i) Physical Activity
This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.
(ii) Creative Arts
Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday for
the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a sense of
aesthetics and also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering design later.
(iii) Universal Human Values
This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself and
allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, take decisions with courage,
be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and department, be
sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base. Methodology of
teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and dont's, but get students
to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught through group discussions and
real life activities rather than lecturing.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty
mentor each. It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for the
student for the full duration of the UG programme.
(iv) Literary Activity
Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.
(v) Proficiency Modules

This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer familiarity
etc.
(vi) Lectures by Eminent People
Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the students
exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.
(vii) Visits to Local Area
A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.
(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.
(ix) Department Specific Activities
About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of Engineering
/Technology/Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building things (become
a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop. For example, CSE
and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational thinking, and get them to
build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple circuits as an extension of
their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build stuff using their knowledge of
science.
Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be no
tests / assessments during this programme.
References:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE
HS3101 TECHNICAL ENGLISH FOR MARINE ENGINEERS – I L T P C

4 0 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
• To improve the communicative competence of learners
• To help learners use language effectively in academic / technical contexts
• To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
• To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.
• To use language effectively to express their opinions in various media.
UNIT I COMMUNICATING 12
Listening - Short conversation: Introducing to new classmates - Audio / video (formal & informal);
Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening and filling a form (Joining a
course or similar) Speaking - Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; Conversation - politeness
strategies; Telephone conversation; Leave a voicemail; Leave a message with another person; asking
for information to fill details in a form. Reading - Reading brochures (technical context) ; Reading
telephone messages / social media messages relevant to technical context; Reading emails. Writing -
Writing emails / messages; Letters of enquiry Grammar - Simple Present Tense & Present
Progressive; Question forms: Wh-questions; Question Tags; Indirect questions; Vocabulary -
Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (used in technical context)
UNIT II NARRATING 12
Listening - Listening to podcast; Listening to anecdotes / stories / Event narration; Watching
documentaries & interviews with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events;
Interviewing a celebrity; Reporting / summarising of documentaries / podcasts/ interviews. Reading -
Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, Reading travel &
technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing; Paragraph writing (biographical/ autobiographical/ narrative),
Short report on an event (field trip etc.) Blogging. Grammar – Simple Past tense & Past Progressive
tense; Subject-Verb Agreement; Preposition - Vocabulary - Word forms (prefixes& suffixes);
Discourse Markers (Connectives & Sequence words); antonyms&synonyms– phrasal verbs.
UNIT II I DESCRIBING 12
Listening - Listen to a product descriptions; Listen to a process descriptions; Listen to a lecture;
Listen/ View an advertisement about a product. Speaking – Picture description; Giving instruction to
use the product; Presenting a product; Summarising the lecture. Reading - Reading advertisements;
Reading gadget reviews; Reading user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions; Writing instructions;
Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of comparison; Present &
Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; Homophones
UNIT IV CLASSIFYING 12
Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to Scientific lectures; watching educational videos.
Speaking – Small Talk; Mini presentations on select topics; Giving recommendations for an issue.
Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports - Domain specific; Tables / Suitable graphical images.
Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Use of graphic organizers;
Writing recommendations; Transcoding (chart/graph/table to paragraph). Grammar – Articles;
Pronouns - Possessive & Relative clauses. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed / Semi fixed expressions
UNIT V EXPRESSING 12
Listening – Listening to Debates; Listening to /viewing different viewpoints on an issue; Listening to
panel discussion. Speaking – Small group discussions; Debates; Expressing opinions through
Simulations & Roleplay activities, Reading – Reading editorials; Reading Opinion Blogs; Writing –
Essay Writing (Descriptive or narrative). Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation
(Statements & Questions); Simple, Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect
Expressions – Content v Function words
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
• To listen and comprehend complex academic texts
• To read and infer the denotative and connotative meanings of technical texts
• To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics
• To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
• To express their opinions effectively in both oral and written medium of communication
TEXT BOOKS:
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department
of English, Anna University.
2. Learning to Communicate by Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta Sharma,
Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill Education,
ISBN : 0070264244.
4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 3 3 2.4 2.4 3 3 3 2.6 3 3 3 - - -
• 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
• Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
MA3101 MATHEMATICS FOR MARINE ENGINEERING – I L T P C

4 0 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide the required knowledge on fundamentals of geometry integrals and integral calculus
for engineering applications.
• To understand the basic concepts of differentiation.
• To apply the concept of partial differentiation for the functions of several variables.
• To understand the basic concepts of integration.
• To apply the integration concepts in double and triple integrations.
UNIT I THREE DIMENSIONAL ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY 12

Equation of lines and planes in three dimensional space -Equation of a sphere – Plane section of a
sphere – Tangent plane – Equation of a cone – Right circular cone – Equation of a cylinder – Right
circular cylinder.
UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Differentiation of algebraic, circular, exponential and logarithmic functions, products, quotient
functions of a function and simple implicit functions - Successive differentiation : Introduction and
notation - nth order derivatives of standard functions - nth order derivatives using (a) Trigonometric
identities and standard functions (b) Partial fractions - Leibnitz's theorem - Maclaurin’s theorem -
Taylor’s theorem - Indeterminate forms and L’Hospital’s rule - Maxima and Minima of one variable
functions – Concavity - Curve tracing of cartesian curves.
UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Limits and continuity - Partial derivatives – Definition - Geometrical interpretation and rules of partial
differentiation - Higher order partial derivatives - Homogeneous functions - Euler’s theorem for
homogenous functions – Total derivatives and chain rules - Differentiation of implicit functions and
composite functions - Errors and approximations - Maxima and Minima - Method of Lagrangian
multipliers.
UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Integration of standard forms by substitution and by parts - Definite integral as the limit of a sum -
Application of integration to area under curve - Volume of revolution - First moment of area and the
position of a centroid of an area - Work done by variable forces - Mean values, Root mean square
values of sin nx and cos nx. Rules of Guldinus -Theorems of parallel and perpendicular axes -
Second moments of area and moments of inertia of a rectangular and circular laminas.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double and triple integrals – Cartesian coordinates - Region of integration and change of order of
integration - Spherical polar and cylindrical coordinates - Theorems of parallel and perpendicular axes
- Second moments of area and moments of inertia of a rectangular and circular laminas - Applications
- Area, Volume, Mass of wire, Lamina and solid - Centre of Gravity of wire, lamina and solid - Moment
of inertia using multiple integrals.
TOTA L: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
• Understand the fundamentals of geometry integrals and integral calculus for engineering
applications.
• Appreciate for having the basic concepts of differentiation.
• Understand to apply the concept of partial differentiation for the functions of several variables.
• Understand the basic concepts of integration and how to apply the integration concepts in
double and triple integrations.
• The basic concepts of analytical geometry and differential and integral calculus learnt by the
Students will be applied to marine engineering.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 44th Edition, Khanna Publications,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. KreyszigE, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi,
India, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics”, 9th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Ltd., 2014.
2. Embleton, W. and Jackson, L., “Mathematics for Engineers”, Vol - I, 7th Edition, Reed’s Marine
Engineering Series, Thomas Reed Publications, 1997.
3. Jain R.K and Iyengar S.R.K,” Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 5thEdition, Narosa
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
th
4. James, G., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 7 Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Ramana, B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To make the students effectively to achieve an understanding of mechanics.
• To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
• To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
• Equipping the students to be successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
• To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.
UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multi-particle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM – kinetic
energy of system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational kinetic
energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies – M.I of a
diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of angular momentum
– rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional pendulum – double
pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.
UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9
The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on the
wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and waves in
matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM waves:
Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone reception.
Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-vacuum
interface for normal incidence.
UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9
Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating systems
- waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave - sound waves -
Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection - interference –
Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment. Theory of laser - characteristics -
Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population inversion - Nd-YAG laser,
CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.
UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9
Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger equation
(Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function - Normalization –Free
particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes- Normalization, probabilities and the
correspondence principle.
UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9
The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)- Tunneling
microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for particles in a
periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
• Understand the importance of mechanics.
• Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
• Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
• Understand the importance of quantum physics.
• Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy
bands.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017.
2. E.M.Purcell and D.J.Morin, Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge Univ.Press, 2013.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill
(Indian Edition), 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian Edition),
2009.
2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer- Verlag,
2012.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
CY3101 CHEMISTRY FOR MARINE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
• To introduce the basic concepts on the chemistry and mechanism of different types of
corrosion of materials.
• To facilitate the understanding of various corrosion control methods.
• To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
• To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and applications of
energy conversion and storage devices.
UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

Water: Sources and impurities; Significance and estimation (only mention of methods) of - turbidity,
colour, pH, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, solids, chlorides, residual chlorine, sulphates, fluorides,
phosphates, iron and manganese, arsenic, DO, BOD, COD, nitrogen, grease, volatile acids.
Treatment of water: Zeolites process and ion exchange demineralization; Desalination of water:
Reverse osmosis and Electro dialysis; Municipal water treatment: Primary treatment and
Disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).
UNIT II CHEMISTRY OF CORROSION 9

Introduction: Dry or chemical corrosion, Wet or electrochemical corrosion, Mechanism of wet or
electrochemical corrosion- galvanic (or bimetallic) corrosion- concentration cell corrosion- passivity-
underground or soil corrosion- pitting corrosion- intergranular corrosion- water line corrosion- stress
corrosion- microbiological corrosion- galvanic series- factors influencing corrosion; Uniform and
localized corrosion.
UNIT III CORROSION CONTROL METHODS 9

Corrosion control by: Material selection and design; Electrochemical protection - sacrificial anodic
protection and impressed current cathodic protection; Protective coatings: Metallic coatings - hot
dipping, metal cladding, anodizing, galvanizing, tinning, electroplating and electroless plating; Non-
metallic inorganic coatings; Organic coatings: paints, varnishes, enamels and lacquers.
UNIT IV NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics-distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; size-dependent properties
(optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition, properties and uses
of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation of nanomaterials: sol-
gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition, electrochemical deposition and electro
spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine, agriculture, energy, electronics and catalysis.
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy;Nuclear energy: light water nuclear
power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and applications of solar
cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy; Geothermal energy;Batteries: Types
of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery - lead acid battery and lithium-ion-battery;
Fuel cells:H2-O2 fuel cell, microbial fuel cell; Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
• To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable treatment
methodologies to treat water.
• To apply the knowledge of corrosion for material selection and fabrication for specific
requirements.
• To recommend appropriate corrosion control methods for material and equipments protection.
• To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing
applications.
• To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications in
energy sectors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi,
2008.
3. S.S.Dara, “A text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of nanoscience
and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and Materials Science, 2018.
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd Edition,
2017.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University
Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and Technologists,
Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.
GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
• To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
• To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
• To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
• To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building blocks
of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo code, flow chart,
programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for developing algorithms
(iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card in a list of sorted cards,
guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode, debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean,
string, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting, histogram, Students marks
statement, Retail bill preparation.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and looping for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2 nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to Programming”,
2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு L T P C
1 0 0 1
அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3
இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி – தமிழ்
தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன் மம – ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக் கருத்துக்கள் – தமிழ் க்
கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி
இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் – தமிழில்
நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற் றும்
பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.
அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர – சிற் பக்
கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர்
தெய் யும் கமல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப்புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல – இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற,
வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.
அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
மதொல் பொமவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விமளயொட்டுகள் .
அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப் பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய
அறக்மகொட்பொடு – ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் – ெங் ககொல
நகரங் களும் துமற முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும் இறக்குமதி –
கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.
அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில்
தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் ,
சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப்
புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC
1 001
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam Literature
- Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism in Tamil Land
- Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development of Modern
literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.
UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.
UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3
Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.
UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam Literature -
Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities and Ports of
Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of Cholas.
UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN
CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the other
parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of
Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LT PC

0 04 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the problem solving approaches.
• To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
• To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world problems.
• To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
• To do input/output with files in Python.
EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted to
the sample experiments listed here.
1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and developing
flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight of a motorbike,
Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit, etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of list
& tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language, components
of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets & Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas, numpy.
Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to another,
word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems.
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition, 2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers and
Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With Applications to
Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press, 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to Programming”,
2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY: (Any Seven Experiments)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.
• To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise manner.
• To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of experimental
data.
• To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such error.
• To make the student as an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.
1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of

regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
• Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
• Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
• Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing physical
reality.
• Access, process and analyze scientific information.
• Solve problems individually and collaboratively.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
• 1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
• Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters, such
as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
• To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
• To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
• To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles
1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample

using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in water sample.
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness and
DO.
• To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
• To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
• To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
• To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques
TEXT BOOK:
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook of
Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
HS3201 TECHNICAL ENGLISH FOR MARINE ENGINEERS - II L T P C

4 0 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
• To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their LSRW skills
• To enhance learners’ awareness of the general rules of writing for specific audiences
• To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
• To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
• To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placement opportunities.
UNIT I COMPARING & CONTRASTING 12
Listening – Evaluative Listening: Advertisements, Product Descriptions, -Audio / video; Listening and
filling a Graphic Organiser (Choosing a product or service by comparison) Speaking – Marketing a
product, Persuasive Speech Techniques. Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals,
brochures; Writing – Professional emails, Email etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar
– Mixed Tenses, Prepositional phrases, Vocabulary – Etymology (Root words), Vocabulary in
Context, comparative adjectives
UNIT II CAUSE & EFFECT 12

Listening - Listening to longer technical talks, Completing information – gap- filling exercises based on
them. Listening to technical information from podcasts – Listening to process description – Listening
to event description to identify cause & effects - Speaking – Describing and discussing the reasons of
accidents or disasters based on news reports. Reading - Reading longer technical texts on
accidents/disasters, Man-made and natural disasters Writing – Cause and Effect Essays, Letters /
emails of complaint, Writing responses to complaints. Grammar - Active, Passive Voice, Impersonal
passives, Infinitive and Gerunds Vocabulary – Word Formation (Noun-Verb-Adj-Adv), Adverbs
UNIT II I PROBLEM SOLVING 12
Listening – Listening / Watching movie scenes/ documentaries depicting technical problem and
suggesting solutions. Speaking – Case-based group discussion, Group Discussion (virtual and face to
face) - Techniques and Strategies, Ethical dilemmas Reading - Case Studies of the domain, excerpts
from literary text, Critical Reading of news reports. Writing – Letter to the Editor, Writing Checklists,
Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay Grammar - Error identification & correction, If
conditional clauses Vocabulary - Compound Words, Sentence Completion
UNIT IV REPORTING 12
Listening – Listening to news reports – Watching documentaries – Summarising Speaking –
Interviewing, Presenting an oral report, Mini presentations on select topics; Reading – Newspaper
articles; Domain specific Journal reports with infographics(Tables/graphs/charts). Writing –
Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report, Survey Report Grammar – Reported Speech,
Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions, Phrasal verbs
UNIT V PRESENTING 12
Listening – Listening to TED Talks, Presentations, Formal job interview, (analysis of the interview
performance); Speaking – Participating in a Role play, (interview/telephone interview), virtual
interviews, Making presentations with visual aids; Reading – Company profiles, Statement of
Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application –
Cover letter & Resume; Grammar – Numerical adjectives, Relative Clauses Vocabulary – Idioms
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
• To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical texts
• To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in the
written format.
• To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
• To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd.
Department of English, Anna University
2. Learning to Communicate by Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university press.
New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001, New Delhi.
3. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd. 1990,
Delhi.
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
MA3201 MATHEMATICS FOR MARINE ENGINEERING – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide the required skill to apply the concepts of ordinary differential equations.
• To provide the required skill to apply higher order differential equations in marine applications.
• To provide the required skill to apply vector calculus.
• To provide the required skill to apply complex variables.
• To provide the required skill to apply Laplace transformation in marine engineering problems.
UNIT I ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS – FIRST ORDER AND

APPLICATIONS 12
Definition- Order and degree - Formation of differential equation - Solution of first order, first degree
equations in variable separable form, homogeneous equations, other substitutions - Equations
reducible to homogeneous and exact differential equations - Equations reducible to exact Integration-
Factor - Linear differential equation of first order first degree, reducible to linear - Applications to
electrical circuits and orthogonal trajectories
UNIT II ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS – HIGHER ORDER AND

APPLICATIONS 12
th
Higher (n ) order linear differential equations - Definition and complementary solution - Methods of
obtaining particular integral - Method of variation of parameters - Method of undetermined coefficients -
Cauchy’s homogeneous linear differential equations and Legendre’s equations - System of ordinary
differential equations - Simultaneous equations in symmetrical form - Applications to deflection of
beams, struts and columns - Applications to electrical circuits and coupled circuits
UNIT III VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient - Divergence and curl – Directional derivative – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields –
Vector integration – Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes’ theorem
(excluding proofs) – Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelopipeds.
UNIT IV ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12

Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions – Necessary conditions - Cauchy – Riemann
equation and sufficient conditions (excluding proofs) – Harmonic and orthogonal properties of analytic
function – Harmonic conjugate – Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping
1
: w = z + c, cz, , and bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12

Laplace transform – Conditions for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic properties
– Transform of derivatives and integrals – Transform of unit step function and impulse functions –
Transform of periodic functions - Definition of inverse Laplace transform as contour integral –
Convolution theorem (excluding proof) – Initial and final value theorems – Solution of linear ODE of
second order with constant coefficients using Laplace transformation techniques.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• Apply the concepts of ordinary differential equations.
• Apply higher order differential equations in marine applications.
• Apply vector calculus.
• Apply complex variables.
• Apply Laplace transformation in marine engineering problems.
• The basic and fundamental knowledge gained by the students in the application of ordinary
differential equations vector fields and transformations will be applied by them in the process
field related to marine engineering.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 44th Edition, Khanna Publications,
New Delhi, 2018.
th
2. Kreyszig E, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10 Edition, John Wiley, India, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, 10thEdition, Laxmi
Publications (p) Ltd., 2015.
2. Jain R.K and Iyengar S.R.K, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 5thEdition, Narosa Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. James, G., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 5thEdition, Pearson Education, 2016.
4. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2016.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO6 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
PH3251 MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To make the students to understand the basics of crystallography and its importance in
studying materials properties.
• To understand the electrical properties of materials including free electron theory, applications
of quantum mechanics and magnetic materials.
• To instil knowledge on physics of semiconductors, determination of charge carriers and device
applications
• To establish a sound grasp of knowledge on different optical properties of materials, optical
displays and applications
• To inculcate an idea of significance of nano structures, quantum confinement and ensuing
nano device applications.
UNIT I CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 9
Crystal structures: BCC, FCC and HCP – directions and planes - linear and planar densities – crystal
imperfections- edge and screw dislocations – grain and twin boundaries - Burgers vector and elastic
strain energy- Slip systems, plastic deformation of materials - Polymorphism – phase changes –
nucleation and growth – homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL AND MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Quantum free electron theory :Tunneling – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics –
Density of energy states – Electron in periodic potential – Energy bands in solids – tight binding
approximation - Electron effective mass – concept of hole. Magnetic materials: Dia, para and
ferromagnetic effects – paramagnetism in the conduction electrons in metals – exchange interaction
and ferromagnetism – quantum interference devices – GMR devices.
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTORS AND TRANSPORT PHYSICS 9

Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect band gap semiconductors –
Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier concentration
in N-type & P-type semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with temperature – Carrier
transport in Semiconductors: Drift, mobility and diffusion – Hall effect and devices – Ohmic contacts –
Schottky diode.
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials – Optical processes in semiconductors: optical absorption and
emission, charge injection and recombination, optical absorption, loss and gain. Optical processes in
quantum wells – Optoelectronic devices: light detectors and solar cells – light emitting diode – laser
diode - optical processes in organic semiconductor devices –excitonic state – Electro-optics and
nonlinear optics: Modulators and switching devices – plasmonics.
UNIT V NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9

Quantum confinement – Quantum structures – quantum wells, wires and dots – Zener-Bloch
oscillations – Resonant tunneling – quantum interference effects - mesoscopic structures - Single
electron phenomena – Single electron Transistor. Semiconductor photonic structures – 1D, 2D and
3D photonic crystal. Active and passive optoelectronic devices – photo processes – spintronics –
carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to
• know basics of crystallography and its importance for varied materials properties
• gain knowledge on the electrical and magnetic properties of materials and their applications
• understand clearly of semiconductor physics and functioning of semiconductor devices
• understand the optical properties of materials and working principles of various optical devices
• appreciate the importance of functional nanoelectronic devices.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.Raghavan. Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course, Prentice Hall India Learning
Private Limited, 2015.
2. S.O. Kasap, Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
3. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Devices: Basic Principles, Wiley (India), 2007.
4. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Technology, Mc-Graw Hill India
(2019)
5. G.W.Hanson. Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics. Pearson Education (Indian Edition), 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Balasubramaniam, Callister’s Materials Science and Engineering. Wiley (Indian Edition), 2014.
2. Wendelin Wright and Donald Askeland, Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering,
CL Engineering, 2013.
3. Robert F.Pierret, Semiconductor Device Fundamentals, Pearson, 2006
4. Pallab Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Pearson, 2017
5. Ben Rogers, Jesse Adams and Sumita Pennathur, Nanotechnology: Understanding Small
Systems, CRC Press, 2017.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
4 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - - 1 - - -
5 3 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2 1.6 1.4 1.8 1.2 1 1
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
BE3251 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
• To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical machines
• To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
• To educate on the fundamental concepts of digital electronics
• To introduce the functional elements and working of measuring instruments
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law - Kirchhoff’s
Laws –Independent and Dependent Sources – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis, Mesh analysis with
Independent sources only (Steady state)
Introduction to AC Circuits and Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value, Instantaneous
power, real power, reactive power and apparent power, power factor – Steady state analysis of RLC
circuits (Simple problems only)
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9

Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and Applications.
Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase Alternator,
Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.
UNIT III ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9

Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon &Germanium
– PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar Junction Transistor-
Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and Applications, Rectifier and
Inverters
UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9

Review of number systems, binary codes, error detection and correction codes, Combinational logic -
representation of logic functions-SOP and POS forms, K-map representations - minimization using K
maps (Simple Problems only)
UNIT V MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION 9

Functional elements of an instrument, Standards and calibration, Operating Principle, types -Moving
Coil and Moving Iron meters, Measurement of three phase power, Energy Meter, Instrument
Transformers-CT and PT, DSO- Block diagram- Data acquisition.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
1. Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
2. Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
3. Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
4. Explain the basic concepts of digital electronics
5. Explain the operating principles of measuring instruments
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothari DP and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Second Edition,
McGraw Hill Education, 2020
2. S.K.Bhattacharya “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2017.
3. Sedha R.S., “A textbook book of Applied Electronics”, S. Chand & Co., 2008
4. James A .Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, “Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits”, Wiley, 2018.
5. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Kothari DP and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill
Education, 2019.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, 11th Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.
3. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition, 2017.
4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series,
McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

POs PSOs
COs/POs&PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 2 1.8 1 1 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Drawing engineering curves.
2. Drawing freehand sketch of simple objects.
3. Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
4. Drawing development of solids
5. Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)
Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS
conventions and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid — construction of
involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of
Three Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial
views of objects.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 6 +12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12
Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale —lsometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD Software
(Not for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
• Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
• Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
• Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
• Draw the development of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
rd
53 Edition, 2019.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2 n d Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications, Bangalore,
27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an

introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New
Delhi, 2015.
5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition, 2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students
will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Avg. 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
NCC CREDIT COURSE LEVEL 1*
NX3251 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘
Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3252 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 2 Incentives 2

PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
NX3253 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 2 Incentives 2

PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to provide hands on training to the students in:
1. Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common
household plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in common
household wood work.
2. Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
3. Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
4. Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.
GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)
PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling, unions,
reducers, elbows and other components which are commonly used in
household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and flexible pipes
used inhousehold appliances.
WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.
Wood Work Study:

a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.
PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board
wiring with lamp, fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using
Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater
GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.
BASIC MACHINING WORK:
a) (simple)Turning.
b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.
ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an airconditioner.
SHEET METAL WORK:

a) Making of a square tray
FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.
PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:

a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:

a) Study an elements of smart phone..
b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.
c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop
TOTAL = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household wood
work.
2. Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
3. Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
4. Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple electronic components
on PCB.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Avg. 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
BE3271 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To train the students in conducting load tests on electrical machines
• To gain practical experience in characterizing electronic devices
• To train the students to use DSO for measurements.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of ohms and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Load test on DC Shunt Motor.
3. Load test on Self Excited DC Generator
4. Load test on Single phase Transformer
5. Load Test on Induction Motor
6. Characteristics of PN and Zener Diodes
7. Characteristics of BJT, SCR and MOSFET
8. Half wave and Full Wave rectifiers
9. Study of Logic Gates
10. Implementation of Binary Adder and Subtractor
11. Study of DSO
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
1. Use experimental methods to verify the Ohm’s and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Analyze experimentally the load characteristics of electrical machines
3. Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
4. Use DSO to measure the various parameters

COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 1
CO/PO & 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 1
PSO
Average
MA3351 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C

3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
• To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
• To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
• To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
• To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations that
model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Formation of partial differential equations –Solutions of standard types of first order partial differential
equations - First order partial differential equations reducible to standard types- Lagrange’s linear
equation - Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients of
both homogeneous and non-homogeneous types.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 9+3

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series and
cosine series – Root mean square value – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier series solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of
two dimensional equation of heat conduction (Cartesian coordinates only).
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3

Statement of Fourier integral theorem– Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3

Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Convergence of Z-transforms - – Initial and final value
theorems - Inverse Z-transform using partial fraction and convolution theorem - Formation of
difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z - transforms.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
• Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in engineering
applications.
• Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
• Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
• Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using Z
transform techniques for discrete time systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 44thEdition, Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, India,
2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Andrews. L.C and Shivamoggi. B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
2. Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2015.
3. James. G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 4thEdition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2018.
6. Wylie. R.C. and Barrett . L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
MV3301 MARINE HYDRAULICS AND FLUID MACHINERY L TPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on properties of fluid
• To understand fluid kinematics and dynamics
• Learn laminar and turbulent flow of fluid
• To understand the working principles and characteristics of different types of pumps used
onboard ship
• Able to classify and understand working of turbines
UNIT I FLUID STATICS 9

Properties of fluid – pressure head – Pascal’s law – absolute and gauge pressures – measurement of
pressure – manometers (single, U-tube, differential), Mechanical gauges – Hydrostatic forces on a
submerged plane and curved surfaces – centre of pressure – Buoyancy and Floatation – Meta-centric
height – stability of floating and submerged bodies.
UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS 9

Kinematics: Types of fluid flow – Types of flow lines – rate of flow – continuity equation – circulation
and vorticity – stream function, velocity potential – equipotent line – cauchy riemann equations – flow
nets.
Dynamics: Euler’s Equation of motion – bernoulli’s equation – applications – venturimeter, orifice
meter, pilot tube – free liquid jet – impulse momentum equation – coriolis co-efficients –flow through
an orifice – torricelli’s theorem – hydraulic coefficients.
UNIT III LAMINAR AND TURBULENT FLOWS 9

Reynold’s experiment – critical Reynolds number – Rotating Viscometer – Navier – stokes equations
of motion– relation between shear stress and pressure gradient – flow of viscous fluid in circular pipes
– turbulent flow – major and minor energy losses – pipes in series and parallel – power transmission
through pipes – boundary layer – characteristics – thickness – total drag due to laminar and turbulent
layer – boundary layer separation and its control.
UNIT IV PUMPS 9
Roto dynamic pumps – principles of dimensional analysis – Buckinghams theorem – important
dimensionless numbers applicable to fluid mechanics – impact of jets – force exerted by a jet on flat,
curved plates and pipe bends. Surge pressure and control – centrifugal pumps – some definitions –
pump output and efficiencies – effect of vane angle– cavitation – constructional details, pump
characteristics, multistage pumps. Axial flow pumps – characteristics – constructional details, non-
dimensional parameters – efficiencies. Vibration & noise in hydraulic pumps.
UNIT V HYDRAULIC TURBINES 9
Classification of hydraulic turbines – pelton turbines, velocity triangle – efficiencies – non dimensional
numbers, working principle of the pelton wheel. francis and kaplan turbines – velocity triangles, -
efficiencies of the draft tubes, hydraulic turbine characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To understand the Fluid properties and effect of various forces acting on different planes,
surfaces and Pipes.
CO2: The In-viscid flow and Real Viscous flow and their characteristics.
CO3: To understand the working principles of pumps.
CO4: To understand and apply the theoretical knowledge hydraulic turbines fitted on board ships.
CO5: Apply basic equation of laminar flow and turbulent flows of liquid.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joy, “Hydraulic Power Transmission In Marine Machinery”, Marine Engineering Practice Vol-1,
Part-07 , IMarEST, London,2002
2. Gupta, S.C.,” Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines” 1st Ed. Pearson, 2011.
3. John F.Douglas, Janusz M. Gasiorek, John A. Swaffield and Lynne B. Jack, “ Fluid Mechanics”,
1st Ed. Pearson, Sixth Impression, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Roberson, J.A. and Crowe C.T., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, 6th Edition, John wiley, 1999.
2. Narayana Pillai,N,”Principles of Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines”,3rd Edition, University
Press, 2013
3. James A. Fay, “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,1994
4. Anthony Esposito, “ Fluid Power with Applications”,6th Ed. Pearson, 2003
5. R K Rajput, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines” 2nd revised Edition, S.Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2002
6. Bruce,R.M., Donald, F.Y., Theodore, H.O., “Fundamentals Of Fluid Mechanics” 5th Edition,
John Wiley &Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd. India,2002
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO PO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
Avg 2 2 1
MV3302 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS FOR MARINE ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the concepts of stress, strain, principal stresses and principal planes.
● To study the concept of shearing force and bending moment due to external loads in
determinate beams and their effect on stresses.
● To determine stresses and deformation in circular shafts and helical spring due to torsion.
● To compute slopes and deflections in determinate beams by various methods.
● To study the stresses and deformations induced in thin and thick shells.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9
Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compression and Shear Stresses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains –Stresses
on inclined planes – principal stresses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stress.
UNIT II TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9

Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams –
Cantilevers – Simply supported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple bending–
bending stress distribution – Load carrying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched beams –
Shear stress distribution.
UNIT III TORSION 9

Torsion formulation stresses and deformation in circular and hollows shafts – Stepped shafts–
Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical
springs, carriage springs.
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9

Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of slopes
and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy – Maxwell’s reciprocal theorems.
UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9

Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure circumferential and longitudinal stresses
and deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shells subjected to internal pressure –
Deformation in spherical shells – Lame’s theorem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the concepts of stress and strain in simple and compound bars, the importance of
principal stresses and principal planes.
CO2: Understand the load transferring mechanism in beams and stress distribution due to shearing
force and bending moment.
CO3: Apply basic equation of simple torsion in designing of shafts and helical spring
CO4: Calculate the slope and deflection in beams using different methods.
CO5: Analyze and design thin and thick shells for the applied internal and external pressures.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 2016
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Engineering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002
2. Ferdinand P. Been, Russell Johnson, J.r. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials", Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing ‘co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Edition, 2013
4. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Press, Oxford Higher Education
Series, 2010.
CO PO PSO
PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO PSO
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3 4
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
Avg 2 2 1
MV3303 MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY L T P C
4 0 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on pumps, piping systems and its fittings
• Inculcate knowledge on heat exchanger, evaporators and distillers
• To acquire peripheral knowledge on oil purifier, air compressor and deck machinery.
• To impart knowledge on pollution prevention equipment’s
• To understand the concepts of steering gear system
UNIT I PUMPS, PIPING SYSTEMS AND FITTINGS 12

Layout of main and auxiliary machinery in Engine Rooms of different ships, different types of pumps –
centrifugal, gear, screw and reciprocating- characteristics performance, applications and
maintenance. Piping system- bilge and ballast, fuel oil bunkering and service, lubricating oil, engine
central cooling system, steam and condensate system, central priming system, control and service air
system, hydrophore system and fire main system. Different types of valves- globe, gate, butterfly,
relief valve, Quick closing valve, pressure reducing valve, SDNR valve- principle, working and
applications. Principle and working of simplex and duplex filters, Autoclean, back flushing and
magnetic filters. Different types of packing materials used on board the ships.
UNIT II HEAT EXCHANGERS, EVAPORATORS AND DISTILLERS 12

Principle of surface heat transfer–description, contact heat transfer, construction of shell and tube
type–flat plate type, single and double pass–lubricating oil coolers, fuel oil heaters, fresh water
coolers, compressed air coolers, Calorifier. Maintenance of heat exchanger and Thermal expansion
allowance Distilling equipment on board a ship, methods of distillation- single effect and double effect
shell type evaporator, low pressure vacuum evaporator, flash evaporators, multiple effect
evaporators. Maintenance of Freshwater generator. Salinometer- Reverse osmosis desalination plant
– membranes - drinking water and treatment.
UNIT III THEORY OF OIL PURIFIER, AIR COMPRESSOR AND DECK MACHINERY 12
Construction, operation, maintenance of fuel oil and lubrication oil purifiers- clarifiers together with self
de sludge operation. Construction and Operation, maintenance of main air compress. Theory of air
compressor. Emergency air compressor. Uses of compressed air on board the ships. Construction
and operation of bow thrusters, cargo winches, windlass and mooring winches.
UNIT IV POLLUTION PREVENTION EQUIPMENTS 12

Prevention of pollution by oil, garbage, sewage- IMO requirement as per MARPOL act. Operation,
construction, maintenance of oily water separator both manual and automatic versions- coalescence-
ODMS- Control system – Discharge criteria of waste bilge water. Operation, construction,
maintenance of incinerator- sludge burning procedure. Construction and operation of sewage
treatment plant on board the ships- comminutor- plant - Discharge criteria of treated sewage water
UNIT V STEERING SYSTEM 12

Hydraulic Telemotor system (Transmitter and receiver), Bypass valve–charging system, hydraulic
power unit–hunting gear heleshaw pump principle, construction and operation pawl and ratchet
mechanism, 2-ram and 4-ram steering gear– Electro-hydraulic steering gear-safematic steering gear
Rotary vane steering gear–construction–operation–safety features, relief, isolating and bypass valves,
steering system regulations and testing–trouble shooting. Rudder restraining, Automatic system,
general arrangement–rudder and pintle, rudder wear down–rudder carrier-swivel bearing
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Apply the knowledge on Characteristics and application of pumps, different Pipeline
systems.
CO2: Work on modern Fresh water generator, Shell and Plate type heat exchanger and drinking
water treatment plant.
CO3: Construct and Operate the Purifiers, Two stage air compressor and different types of deck
machinery.
CO4: Adapt and operate Oily water separator, Incinerator and Sewage treatment plant.
CO5: Modern usage of Steering Gear Operation system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. H.D. McGeorge, “Marine Auxiliary machinery”, 7th edition, Butterworth’s, London, 2011.
2. Leslie Jackson and Thomas D. Morton, “Reed’s general engineering Knowledge for marine
engineers”, 4th edition, Thomas reed’s, 1999.
3. DW Smith, “Marine auxiliary machinery”, 6th edition, Butterworth’s, London, 1987.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Heinz P Bloch, Fred K Geitner,” Machinery Component Maintenance and repair” 3rd edition,
Elsevier,2010.
2. MARPOL 73/78, IMO Publication, 2001.
3. Vikram Gokhale, N. Nanda, “Advanced Marine Engineering Knowledge Vol. II”, 2nd Edition,
Engineer Enterprises, Mumbai, 2001.
4. “Pumping and Piping Diagram”, IME Publication 1999
5. Vikram Gokhale & N. Nanda, “Marine Engineering Knowledge for Junior Engineers, 3rd Edition,
Engineer Enterprises, Mumbai, 1999.
6. DK Sanyal, “Principle and Practices of marine diesel engine” 2nd edition, Bhandarkar Publication,
Mumbai, 1998.
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO5 PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3 4
1 2
2 1 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
Avg 3/2 1 2/2=
=1. 1
5
MV3304 SHIP CONSTRUCTION L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Understand the Ships terms and stresses onboard ships structure.
• Determine the Primary and Secondary girders used onboard ships.
• Distinguish between Fore-end and After-end arrangements onboard ships.
• Understand the free board and Tonnage onboard ships.
• Acquire the knowledge of Off shore Technology and Ship’s Survey.
UNIT I SHIP TERMS 9

Various terms used in ship construction with reference to ship’s parameter e.g. L.B.P. - Moulded
Depth - Moulded draught etc. - General classification of ships. Stresses in Ship’s structure: Hogging –
Sagging – Racking – Pounding – Panting etc., and Strength members to counteract the same.
Sections And Materials Use: Type of sections like angles – Bulb plates flanged beams used in ship
construction – Process of welding. Riveting & Welding testing of welds – Fabricated components.
UNIT II BOTTOM & SIDE FRAMING 9
Double bottoms, watertight floors solid and bracket floors – Longitudinal framing keels – side framing
like tank side brackets – Beam knee – Web frame etc., Shell & Decks: Plating systems for shells –
Deck plating & Deck Girders –discontinuities like hatches and other openings – supporting & closing
arrangements –mid-ship section of ships. Bulk Heads & Deep Tanks: water tight bulkheads –
Arrangement of plating and stiffeners – water tight sliding doors – Water tight openings through
bulkheads for electric cables pipes and shafting – Deep tank for oil fuel or oil cargo corrugated bulk
heads.
UNIT III FORE & AFT END ARRANGEMENTS 9
Fore end arrangement, arrangements to resist pounding bulbous bow – Types of sterns stern frame
and rudder – Types of rudder – Supporting of rudder – Locking pintle – Bearing pintle – Pallister,
bearing shaft tunnel – Tunnel bearings.
UNIT IV FREE BOARD AND TONNAGE 9
Significance and details of markings various international Regulations. Plimsol LineShipyard Practice
- layout of a shipyard – Mould loft –Optical marking – Automatic plate cutting, Fabrication and
assembly etc., Ship Types -Tankers, Ventilation arrangements for pump rooms, holds and oil fuel
tanks – Bulk Carriers, Arrangement for the carriage of dangerous goods in bulk– Container ships –
L.N.G., L.P.G., and Chemical carriers – Lash ships – Passenger ships – Dredgers – Tugs etc., -
Constructional details and requirements.
UNIT V OFFSHORE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drilling ships and Platforms – Supply vessels – fire fighting arrangement – Pipe laying ships – special
auxiliary service ships. Ship Surveys : Survey rules – Functions of ship classification – Societies –
Surveys during construction – Periodical surveys for retention of class.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Apply the knowledge to identify ships stresses.
CO2: Design the Primary and Secondary girders used onboard ships.
CO3: Analyze the Fore-end and After-end arrangements onboard ships.
CO4: Demonstrate the free board and Tonnage onboard ships
CO5: Interpretation of data regarding Ship’s Survey
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.J. Eyres, “Ship Construction”, 4th Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann, Oxford, 1994.
2. Stokoe,E.A., “Reed’s Ship Construction for Marine Engineers”, 1st Edition, Thomas Reed
Publication, London, 2000.
3. Thomas Lamb, “ Ship Design and Construction”, 1st Ed., SNAME, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. A.J. Young, “Ship Construction Sketch & Notes”, 1st Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann,
London,1980.
2. H.J. Pursey, “Merchant Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, Brown Son & Ferguson Ltd. GlasGow Great
Britain, 1994.
3. Larrie D. Ferreiro, “ Ships and Science”, 1st Ed. SNAME, 2006
4. Richard Lee Storch, Colin P. Hammon, Howard McRaven Bunch, and Richard C. Moore, “Ship
Production, 1st Ed., SNAME,1995
CO PO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO PS PS PS PS
12 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
Avg 1 1 2/2=1 1
MV3305 SEAMANSHIP, ELEMENTARY NAVIGATION L T P C

AND SURVIVAL AT SEA 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart working knowledge on Deck equipment and ship department
• Understand working of navigational system and equipment used.
• Practice on various knots
• To impart on LSA knowledge on life saving appliances.
• To practice survival techniques at sea
UNIT I SEAMAN & THEIR DUTIES 9

Ship’s Department, General ship knowledge ad nautical terms like poop-deck forecastle, bridge etc.
deck equipment: winces, windlass, derricks cranes, gypsy, capstan, hatches and function. navigation
lights and signals: port and starboard, forward and aft mast lights, colors and location. look out,
precautions and bad weather, flags used on ships, flag etiquette, sound signals.
UNIT II ROPE KNOTS AND MOORINGS 9

Types of knots. practice of knot formation, materials of ropes, strength, care and maintenance, use of
mooring line, heaving line, rat guards, canvas and it’s use. anchors: their use, drooping and weighing
anchor, cable stopper.
UNIT III NAVIGATION 9

General knowledge of principal stars. Sextant, Navigation compasses, echo sounder, Gps, Glonass,
log and uses, barometer and weather classification, G.M.T and Zonal time, wireless Navigational
Instruments, radar satellite navigation etc.
UNIT IV LIFE BOATS & LIFE RAFTS 9

Life buoy, EPRIB, SART, TPA, Construction, equipment carried, carrying capacity. Davits and their
operation, Launching of life rafts (Inflatable type) Embarkation into lifeboat and life raft. Survival pack,
Stowage and securing arrangement, Abandon ship: Manning of lifeboat and life raft. Muster list. Radio
an alarm signals, Distress signals (S.O.S) Distress Calls time and Radio frequency. Pyro –
techniques.
UNIT V SURVIVAL AT SEA 9

Survival difficulties and factors, equipment available, duties of crew members, Initial action on
boarding, Maintaining the craft, Practical: Knots, bends and hitches, Ropes splice, donning of life
jackets, life boat drills. Lowering & hoisting of life boats (model).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Operate deck equipment’s and carry out department duties
CO2: Apply knowledge choose the ropes for different types of requirement
CO3: Distinguish and select different Navigational equipment for the ship smooth functioning
CO4: Demonstrate competency skills on life saving appliance
CO5: Survive at different condition of sea
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Graham Danton, “The theory and practice of seamanship”, 11th Edition, Routledge, New york,
USA and Canada, 1996.
2. Capt. J. Dinger, “Seamanship Primer”, 7th Edition, Bhandarkar Publications, Mumbai 1998.
3. Kemp & Young, “Seamanship Notes”, Stanford Maritime limited, 1997
REFERENCES
1. A.N. Cockcroft, “Seamenship and Nautical knowledge”, 27th Edition, Brown son & Ferguson Ltd.,
Glasgow 1997.
2. Richards, “ Principles of Modern Radar ”, Yesdee Publishing’s Pvt. Ltd., Indian Reprint 2012
3. Capt.P.M.Sarma , “Theory of Marine Gyro Compass”’1st Ed. , Bhandarkar Publications, 2002
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO11 PO12 PS PS PS PS
1 2 10 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
Avg 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1
MV3311 MARINE HYDRAULICS AND FLUID MACHINERY L T P C

LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• To impart knowledge on properties of fluid
• To understand fluid kinematics and dynamics
• Learn laminar and turbulent flow of fluid
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(A) FLUID MECHANICS LAB 20
Buoyancy Experiment – Metacentric Height for Cargo and War ship models. Fluid flow measurement
using Pitot tube, Flow nozzle, Rotameter, Notches etc. Cd of Venturimeter and orifice-meter.
Determination of frictional losses in pipes.
(B) FLUID MACHINERY LAB 25
Centrifugal pumps- Performance characteristics of a constant speed pump, specific speed.
Performance characteristics of multistage pump. Characteristics of Impulse and Reaction Turbine
Specific speed and unit quantities. Positive displacement pumps. Performance characteristics of a
deep well pump, Jet pump
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the flow behavior of fluids
CO2: Calculate the frictional losses and Cd of fluids when it passes through various obstructions
CO3: Calculate the performance characteristics of hydraulic pumps and turbines.
REFERENCES
1. Laboratory Manuals
2. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”,6th Ed. Pearson, 2003
3. Schobeiri, “Fluid Mechanics for Engineers”, 1st Ed. Springer, Indian Reprint 2013(Yesdee
Publishings Pvt. Ltd.)
4. Shesha Prakash, “Experiments in Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines: Theory and Procedures”,
1st Ed. PHI Learnings Pvt. Ltd.,, 2011
MV3312 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND APPLIED MECHANICS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 42
OBJECTIVE:
● To understand the concepts of stress, strain, principal stresses and principal planes.
● To study the concept of shearing force and bending moment due to external loads in determinate
beams and their effect on stresses.
● To determine stresses and deformation in circular shafts and helical spring due to torsion
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LAB
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension Test on M.S. Rod.
2. Compression test – Bricks, concrete cubes.
3. Deflection Test - Bench type verification of Maxwell theorem.
4. Tension test on thin wire.
5. Hardness test on various machines.
6. Tests on wood - Tension, compression, bending, impact in work testing machine.
7. Tests on springs - Tension, compression.
APPLIED MECHANICS LAB
8. Impact test.
9. Double shear Test in U.T.M.
10. Load measurement using load indicator, load coils.
11. Fatigue test.
12. Strain measurement using Rosette strain gauge.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To operate the various testing machines.
CO2: To carry out various tests on materials
CO3: To choose the best materials for a particular use, based on the test results
REFERENCES
2. Jindal, U.C., “ Strength of Materials’, 1st Ed., Pearson, 2011
GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC

0 021
OBJECTIVES:
To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
• To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using standard
templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance the
presentability and overall utility value of content.
• To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the common
statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search and explore,
visualize, interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
• To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS PowerPoint,
including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media elements and
enhance the overall quality of presentations.
MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility
MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook
MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
• Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their day
to day technical and academic requirements
• Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
• Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common
tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.
MV3401 MARINE ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T PC
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To expose the students to the Electrical equipment’s fitted on boards ships, the concepts of
electrical measurements and electrical distribution systems.
● To make the students to understand the concepts of Electricity production,
● To impart knowledge on measurements, cable faults and AC Machines used in Marine
Engineering.
● To understand Principles of operation and construction details of synchronous motors,
induction machines
● To impart knowledge on Speed control and trouble shooting in induction machines.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF D.C. MACHINES AND GENERATORS 9+3

Principles of DC machines – construction – winding and E.M.F equations – armature reaction –
commutation – brush shift – compensating winding – D.C. generator – their characteristics- methods
of excitation – parallel operation – performance equations.
D.C. Motor –their characteristics – starting and reversing – speed – torque equations – starters–
speed control including electronic method of control – testing of D.C. machines for finding out the
losses and efficiency – braking of D.C. motor, Ward-Leonard control.
UNIT II TRANSFORMERS 9+3

Transformers – types and applications – operating principle – E.M.F. Equations – phase diagrams
under no load and load conditions – leakage resistance – equivalent circuits –voltage regulation –
losses and efficiency – open circuit and short circuit tests – parallel operation – three phase
transformers – core and shell type – current and potential transformers – auto- transformers (single
phase and three phase) - specification of coolants.
UNIT III ALTERNATORS 9+3

Alternators – general arrangement – construction of salient pole and cylindrical rotor types – types of
stator windings – E.M.F equation – distribution and pitch factor –waveform of E.M.F. generated –
rotating magnetic field – armature reaction – voltage regulation – load characteristics – open circuit
and short circuit tests – E.M.F and M.M.F. methods – parallel operation of alternators – KW and KVA
sharing – Brushless alternator – static excitation system.
UNIT IV SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 9+3

Principle of operation of 3-phase synchronous motor. – operation of infinite bus bars torque/angle
characteristics – hunting – methods of starting – merits and limits of synchronous motor over others.
UNIT V INDUCTION MACHINES 9+3

Three phase induction motor –Principle of operation and theory of action – slip speed–rotor to stator
relationship – rotor frequency – rotor e.m.f. and current – equivalent circuit relationship between rotor
IR loss and rotor slip – torque/Slip characteristics – starting torque and maximum running Torque-
Effect of change in supply voltage on Torque-Induction generator.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Operate D.C. Machines
CO2: Operate and Maintain Transformers
CO3: Design features of Alternators – their construction and operation.
CO4: Synchronous the motor
CO5: Operate and maintain induction machines
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Edmund G R, Kraallavers, “Advanced Electo-technology For Marine Engineers”, 2nd Ed.
Reeds Vol 07, Adlard Coles Nautical, London, 2010
2. W. Laws, “Electricity Applied To Marine Engineering”, 4th edition, The Institute Of Marine
Engineers, London, 1998.
3. IHerman, “Electrical Transformers and Rotating Machines”, 3rd Ed. Cengage, First Indian
Reprint 2012 ( Yesdee Publishings Pvt. Ltd.),
4. Edmund GR Kraal, Stanley Buyers, Christopher Lavers, “Basic electro-technology for marine
engineers”, 4th Ed. Reeds Vol 06,2013
5. Hughes Edward, “Electrical technology”, 2nd edition, “ELBS with DP Publications”, USA, 1996.
6. I.J Nagrath and D.P Kothari, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Uppal S.L., “Electrical Power”, 13th Edition, Khanna publishers, Mumbai, 2002.
2. Berde M.S.,” Electric Motor Drives”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers, Mumbai, 1995.
3. W. Laws, “Electricity Applied To Marine Engineering”, 4th edition, The Institute Of Marine
Engineers, London, 1998.
4. Gorti Ramamurthi, “Handbook of Electrical Power Distribution”, 2nd Ed.Universities Press,
2009
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5 3/3 3/3= 5/5= 4/4= 4/4=
=1 =1 1 1 1 1
MV3402 MARINE REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C

3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart the knowledge of students in
● Reciprocating compressors
● Basic refrigeration and air conditioning
● Marine refrigerating plants
● LMTD and NTU Methods
UNIT I RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

Ideal cycle for compressors work transfer in a single stage compressor – mass flow – volume flow –
free air delivery – effect of clearance and volumetric efficiency in single stage compressors. Multi
stage compression neglecting clearance volume. Condition for minimum work input and perfect inter
cooling. Tandem in line arrangements in compressors. air motors.
UNIT II BASIC REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
Reversed Carnot cycle – vapour compression cycle – refrigerating effect – co-efficient of
performance – cooling capacity – refrigerants used in marine practice and their justification - rating of
refrigeration plant – methods for improving C.O.P. – use of vapour tables – applied problems.
UNIT III MARINE REFRIGERATING PLANTS
Typical marine refrigerating plants with multiple compression and evaporator system – heat pump
cycles – refrigeration in liquefied gas carriers – applied problems.
UNIT IV MARINE AIR CONDITIONING
Principles of air conditioning – Psychrometric properties of air – comfort conditions – control of
humidity – airflow and air conditioning capacity – calculation for ships plants.
UNIT V BASIC DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS

Introduction - types - LMTD and NTU method - double-pipe, shell and tube type, condenser and
evaporator – problems
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Calculate the performance of Reciprocating compressors
CO2: Understand the aspects of Marine refrigeration and air-conditioning
CO3: Operate Marine refrigeration plants
CO4: Apply the knowledge on maintaining air conditioning
CO5: Efficient design of Heat Exchangers for Air conditioning and refrigeration plants.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arora C.P., “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, 1st Edition, Sri Eswar Enterprises,
Chennai, 1993.
2. Stoecker, Wilbert .F Jones, Jerold. W., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, Delhi, 1985.
3. Stott. J.R, “Refrigeration Machinery And Air Conditioning Plant”, Marine Engineering
Practice, Vol-1 P Part-05, IMarEST, London, 1998
REFERENCES:
1. D.A. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Butter Worth,London,1993.
2. J.R. Stott, “Refrigerating Machinery and Air Conditioning Plant”, 1st Edition, The Institute of
Marine Engineers, London, 1974, Reprint 1998.
3. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., “ Heat transfer”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2012
4. Sukhatme, S.P., “ Heat Transfer”,4th Ed. Universities Press, 2011
5. Roy, J. Dossat, “Principles Of Refrigeration”, 1st Ed., Pearson, 2006
6. Kuppan Thulukkanam, “Heat Exchanger Design Handbook”, 1st Ed., CRC Press, 2000

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 2/2=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 1/1=1 2/2=1 2/2=1 2/2=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 3/3=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 2/2=1 2/2=1 2/2=1
MV3403 SHIP’S FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge in students on:
● Fire protection built in ships.
● Detection and safety systems.
● Firefighting Equipment.
● Fire control.
● Safety measures of firefighting equipment.
UNIT I FIRE PROTECTION BUILT IN SHIPS

SOLAS convention, requirements in respect of materials of construction and design of ships, (class
A, B, type BHDS), fire detection systems, fire test, escape means, electrical installations,
ventilation system and venting system for tankers. Statutory requirements for firefighting systems
and equipment’s on different vessels, fire doors & fire zones.
UNIT II DETECTION AND SAFETY SYSTEMS

Fire safety precautions on cargo ships, tankers and passenger ships during working. Types of
detectors, selection of fire detectors and alarm systems and their operational limits. Commissioning
and periodic testing of sensors and detection system. Description of various systems fitted on ships
including micro mist and extinguishing system.
UNIT III FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Fire pumps, hydrants and hoses, couplings, nozzles and international shore connection,
construction, operation and merits of different types of portable, non-portable and fixed fire
extinguishers installations for ships, properties of chemicals used, water-mist fire suppression
system. Advantages of various fire extinguishing agents including vaporizing fluids and their
suitability for ship’s use. control of class A, C & class D fires, Combustion products & their effects
on life safety.
UNIT IV FIRE CONTROL

Action required and practical techniques adopted for extinguishing fires in accommodation, machinery
spaces, boiler rooms, cargo holds and galley. Fire fighting in port and dry dock. Procedure for re-
entry after putting off fire, Rescue operations from affected compartments. First aid, fire organization
on ships, shipboard organization for fire and emergencies. Combustion products and their effects on
life safety, fire signal and muster. Fire drill. Leadership and duties, Fire control plan, human
behaviour.
UNIT V SAFETY MEASURES

Special safety measures for preventing, fighting fire in tankers, chemical carriers, oil rigs, supply
vessels, and fire fighting ships - Safe working practice with respect to fire on board ships and first aid
for hazards arising from fire in ships.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
● Fire protection, Detection and Safety systems in ships.
● Construction, Operation and Maintenance of Fixed and portable Fire Extinguishers in ships.
● Fire prevention and control in oil tankers, LPG / LNG carriers, Chemical tankers, oil rigs,
supply vessels
● Operation of Fire fighting ships
● Extinguish Major Fire and Follow safe working practices.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Rush Brook, “Fire Aboard”, 3rd Edition, Brown, son & Ferguson Ltd., Glassgow 1988.
2. Victory.G, Owen.I.H, “Fire Fighting Equipment And Its Use In Ships”, Marine Engineering
Practice, Vol 1, Part 05, IMarEST, London, Reprint 1998
3. M.G. Stavitsky, V.I. Vostryakov, M.F.Kortunov, V.I. Martynenko & V.M. Sidoryok., “Fire Fighting
Aboard ships Vol. I & Vol. II, Structural Design and Fire Extinguishing System”, 1st Ed. Gulf
publishing company, Houston, London, 1983.

PO PSO
CO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
1
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1 1
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 8/4 4/4 2/2 1/1 4/4 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 1/1 3/3 5/5
=2 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1
MV3405 MARINE DIESEL ENGINES LTPC
4 0 04
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on various components of marine diesel engines and familiarisation on
marine lubricating oils and associated systems
• To acquire peripheral knowledge on combustion of marine diesel engines, scavenging and
turbocharging system.
• To impart knowledge on marine fuels and its properties, exhaust valve function.
• To impart brief knowledge on main engine safeties and associated systems.
• To understand the importance of reduction on marine air pollutant and acquire basic knowledge
on modern intelligent engines.
UNIT I COMPONENTS OF MARINE DIESEL ENGINE AND LUBRICATION SYSTEM 12

Constructional details of Marine diesel engines- Welded construction for bedplates, Foundation bolts,
‘A’ frames, crosshead and guide shoes, main bearings, Crankshaft and its types - Cam shaft,
connecting rod, stuffing box- Piston and piston rod, cylinder liners, cylinder heads and its mountings,
tie rods, Engine chocks and its types- merits and demerits of chocks.
Auxiliary power transmission- chain and belt – gear transmission etc. Lubricating oils properties and
testing of lubricating oils- Types of lubrications - Lubrication system- Main and crosshead bearing
lubrication - Rocker arm- Cylinder liner lubrication. lubricating oil contamination- microbial attack-
remedies - Alpha lubricator - cylinder oil properties - Cylinder lubricating quills-significance of cylinder
lubricating oil.
UNIT II SCAVENGING&TURBOCHARGING AND COMBUSTION PROCESS 12
Scavenging system in two stroke and four stroke engines - various types of scavenging in two stroke
engines- Merits and demerits of various scavenging system- under piston scavenging - scavenge
manifolds and scavenge cooler -auxiliary blowers and its importance. Turbo charging and
supercharging- types of turbocharging system - pulse and constant pressure type – axial and radial
flow turbo charging- merits and demerits -significance of Turbo charger – turbo charger seals and
arrangements- wet and dry cleaning of turbocharger -expansion allowance in exhaust manifold- turbo
charger lubrication system- turbocharger surging. various factors affecting the combustion- two stroke
and four stroke engine piston - various types of piston rings – piston ring clearances- types of piston
cooling system – merits and demerits of different type of piston cooling systems.
UNIT III MARINE FUEL OIL, FUEL SYSTEM AND ENGINE RATINGS 12
Fuel oil properties - fuel oil system – fuel oil mixing column, fuel pumps -jerk and common rail
systems - VIT Super VIT & Electronic injection systems. fuel injector - Incorporation of FQSL along
with the VIT system on the engine- Pre combustion and post combustion effects. Exhaust valve types
and its operation- Rotocap mechanism - Exhaust valve timing in 2’s and 4’s Marine Diesel engine –
Factors affecting the operation of exhaust valves. Combustion of fuel - Mean Piston speed- Mean
effective pressure- Compression ratio-Reasons for variation in compression pressure and peak
pressure and its effect on engines - critical speed- MCR & CSR ratings - Heat balance diagram - Fuel
contaminants -Microbiological attack.
UNIT IV MAIN ENGINE SAFETIES AND ASSOCIATED SYSTEM 12
Starting and reversing systems of Marine diesel engines - Maneuvering system - Main Engine auto
slowdown and shutdown -Crash maneuvering - Safety interlock system – turning gear arrangement
and importance, Crankcase relief valve - crankcase inspection, oil mist detector and its operation,
crankshaft deflection. main engine power delivery- Indicator instrument- Power card -simple draw
cards and out of phase diagrams - significance of power diagram - power calculations- fault detection.
UNIT V EMISSION CONTROL AND MODERN INTELLIGENT ENGINES 12

Control of NOX, SOX in exhaust emission -deviation from ideal condition in actual engines,
comparative study of slow speed, medium speed and high engines. Construction and Operation of
Sulzer, MAN and B&W, Mitsui, Mitsubishi etc. Latest development in marine diesel engines–cam less
engines, UMS–Operation, Intelligent engines - RT-flex engines.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Define and identify solution to Marine fuel injection systems.
2. Explain the combustion inside marine engines
3. Apply and recognize the need for the appropriate techniques to enhance fuel system.
4. Illustrate and Asses the Maneuverings systems of various marine diesel engines
5. Select the modern tools to distinguish emission controls.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Wood yard, Doug, “Pounder’s Marine Diesel Engines”, 7th Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing, London, 2014.
2. Sanyal D.K, “Principle & Practice of Marine Diesel Engines”, 2nd Edition, Bhandarkar
Publication, Mumbai, 2010
3. D.A. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann,
London, 1996
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Christensen, Stanley G “Lamb's Questions and Answers on The Marine Diesel Engine”, 8th
Edition, Butter Worth Publications, 2001
2. John Lamb, “Marine Diesel Engines”, 8th Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann, London, 1990.
3. Christen Knak, “Diesel Motor Ships Engines and Machinery”, 1st Edition, Marine Management
Ltd.,
London, 1990.
4. C.C Pounder, “Marine Diesel Engines”, 6th Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann, Scotland,
1995.
5. S. H. Henshall, “Medium and High-Speed Diesel Engines for Marine Use”, 1st Edition, Institute
of Marine Engineers, Mumbai, 1996.
6. VL Maleev, “Internal Combustion Engines”, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill book co., Singapore,
1987.
7. A.B. Kane, “Marine Internal Combustion Engines”, 1st Edition, Shroff Publishers &
Distributors, Mumbai, 1984.

CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO PO PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 2 1 1 1
2 1 1
3 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
Avg 3/2 1/1 1/1 1/1 2/2 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1=1 2/2= 2/2= 2/2=
= =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1
1.5
MV3406 MARINE BOILERS AND STEAM ENGINEEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To Impart the knowledge to the students on
● Marine boilers and steam engines.
● Operation & Maintenance of Boilers
● The concept of marine steam plants operations
● Lubrication for Steam Engines and Turbines
● Operation and maintenance of turbines
UNIT I MARINE BOILERS & BOILER MOUNTINGS 9

Scotch Boiler, Cochran, Spanner, Clarkson thimble tube, Waste heat recovery calculation, Lamont
exhaust gas boiler, Composite boilers, Water tube boilers – Babcock Wilcox, Foster Wheeler – D-
type, Double evaporation boilers. Safety Valves – Improved High Lift, Full lift and full Bore type:
Gauge glass – Ordinary plate type and remote Indicator; Automatic feed regulator, three element High
& Low water level alarms, Main Steam stop valve, Retractable type Soot blower etc.
UNIT II OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF BOILERS 9

Pre-commissioning procedures, Hydraulic tests, steam raising and Operating procedures, Action in
the event of shortage of water. Regular boiler water tests on board. Blowing down of boiler, Laying up
a boiler; general maintenance, External and internal tube cleaning. Tube renewals, etc., maintenance,
inspection and survey of boilers. Refractory: Purposes of refractory, types of refractory and reasons
for failure. Oil burning: Procedure of Liquid fuel burning in open furnace, Various types of atomizer,
Furnace arrangement for oil burning, Boiler Control System i.e. master control, fuel control, air control
and viscosity control, Introduction to Automation.
UNIT III MARINE STEAM PLANTS 9

Steam engines - History of multiple expansion marine reciprocating engines &steam turbines.
Description of different types of steam turbines. Layout of plant - General layout of plant & description
of a modern geared steam turbine installation including auxiliaries in modern use, open and closed
feed system.
Condensers - Types of condensers, constructional details, location & working principles, contraction
and expansion allowances, leak test. Effect of change of temperature, circulating water quantity,
change of main engine power, condenser surface.
UNIT IV LUBRICATION FOR STEAM ENGINES AND TURBINES 9

Suitable oils and their properties, lubrication of main bearings, thrust bearings and gears. Gravity and
pressure lubrication-oil system and emergency lubrication arrangement.
UNIT V OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF TURBINES 9

Turbine drain system, turbine gland system, warming through a turbine plant, control of speed and
power of propulsion, throttle valve control and nozzle control, emergency controls, emergency
operation of turbines, vibration in marine steam turbine, steam turbine losses. Breakdown and
faultfinding. Selection of materials: Materials used in various components like blades, rotors, casings,
sealing glands, gears etc. & their justification.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Define the Waste heat recovery system and boiler mountings.
CO2: Infer the Operation and Watch keeping of boilers.
CO3: Demonstrate the Construction of steam turbines and steam engines.
CO4: Illustrate The Various Method of Lubrication of turbines
CO5: Define the operation and maintenance of steam turbines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1.J.H. Milton & R.M. Leach, “Marine Steam Boilers”, 4th Edition, Butter worth, London, 1980
2.C. McBirnie, “Marine Steam Engines and Turbines”, 4th Edition, Butter worth, London 1980.
3.Thomas D. Morton, “Steam Engineering Knowledge for Marine Engineers”, 3rd Edition, Thomas
Reed Publications, London 1979.
REFERENCES
1.GTH. Flanagan, “Marine Boilers” 3rd Edition, Butter worth, London, 2001.
2.K.M.B. Donald, “Marine Steam Turbines”, 1st Edition, Institute of Marine Engineers, London,
1977.
3.Leslie Jackson and Thomas D. Morton, “General Engineering Knowledge for Marine Engineers,
Reed’s Vol.8, Thomas Reeds Publication, United Kingdom, 2003
4.Norros.A, “Operation of Machinery in Ships Steam Turbines, Boilers”, Marine Engineering
Practice, Vol 2, Part 15, IMarEST, London, 2000
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1
4 1 1
5 1 1
Avg 1/1 1/1 4/4 1/1 1/1 1/1 2/2 1/1= 1/1= 1/1= 1/1= 1/1= 1/1=1
=1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1 1
GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T PC

2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and emphasize
on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
• To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
• To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and nonrenewable
resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
• To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental management.
• To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity–
values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6
Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .
UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 6
Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different types
new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal energy
conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6
Development, GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects of
sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and protocols-
Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate change- Global,
Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies. Concept of Carbon
Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.
UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6
Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles-
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio-
economical and technological change.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
their conservation.
• To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and contribute
to the preventive measures in the society.
• To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
• To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
• To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials, energy
cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication, London,
1998.
REFERENCES :
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 . Edition 2010.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, Third
Edition, 2015.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
NX3451 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C
3 0 0 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3
LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty, Ratan Tata,
Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7
DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services, Assistance,
Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1
ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3
GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4
ARMED FORCES 6
AF 1 Armed Forces, Army, CAPF, Police 6
ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2
BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NX3452 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LTPC
3 003
LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services, Assistance,
Civil Defence Organisation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
AF 1 Armed Forces and Navy Capsule 3
EEZ 1 EEZ Maritime Security and ICG 3
ADVENTURE 1

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
NX3453 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C

3 00 3
LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty, Ratan Tata,
Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 6

GSK 1 Armed Forces & IAF Capsule 2
GSK 2 Modes of Entry in IAF, Civil Aviation 2
GSK 3 Aircrafts - Types, Capabilities & Role 2
ADVENTURE 1

MV3411 WELDING TECHNIQUES, LATHE AND SPECIAL MACHINE SHOP L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To develop skill of the students on
• Welding and Welding techniques
• Usage of hand tools
• Sheet metal work and pipe work
WELDING TECHNIQUES
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. WELDING - Exercises in Electric Arc welding and Gas welding Advanced Techniques.
2. HAND TOOLS - Hand tools, sharpening, Powered hand tools, Measurements etc. Exercise
involving above.
3. SHEET METAL WORKING - Simple Exercise.
4. PIPE WORK - Experiments involving thin pipes, Joining, bending, welding and inspection.
LATHE & SPECIAL M/C SHOP

5. Lathe – Straight turning, Step turning, under cut, taper turning, knurling and thread cutting
exercises. Shaping Machine – Making square from round rod and grooving exercises. Exercises
on milling machine. Grinding: Exercises to the required accuracy on universal cylindrical grinder
and surface grinder. Slotting Machine: Slotting and Key-way cutting.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To carry out repair of Ship machinery and components by welding

CO2: To do any kind of sheet metal works
CO3: To make machine components using Lathes and Special machines such as milling, grinding
and slotting machine.
REFERENCES:
1. Youssef, “Machining Technology”, 1st Vol. Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint 2012 (Yesdee
Publishing’s Pvt. Ltd.)
2. Kuppuswamy, G., “Principles of Metal Cutting”, 1st Ed. Universities Press, Reprint 2013
3. Mukherjee,S., “Metal Fabrication Technology”,1st Ed., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010
4. Larry Jeffus, “ Welding and Metal Fabrication”, 1st. Ed. Cengage Learning, Indian Print,2012
(Yesdee Publishings Pvt. Ltd.)
WELDING WORK SHOP

Sl. No. Name of the Equipment Qty.
1. Welding Transformer Air Cooled with Fan 04
2. Maxi – MIG 400A Welding Set 01
3. AOL make TIG Control Outfit 01
4. Welding Rectifier Throluxe – 401 MMA 01
5. Water Cooled Torch 0150102071 400 AMPS 02
6. Bending Machine Pipe dia ½” to 3” 01
7. Gas welding and cutting set 02
FITTING SHOP
Sl. No. Name of the Equipment Qty.
1. Power Hacksaw 01
2. Vernier Height Gauge 02
3. Surface Plate with stand 02
4. Fitting Bench Vice 40
5. Hand tools (Different types) 01
MV3412 HEAT ENGINES, BOILER CHEMISTRY AND REFRIGERATION L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To develop skill of the students on
• Demonstration ability to carry out the different tests on heat engines.
• Carrying out the Performance and Characteristics of heat engines.
• Performance tests on boiler feed water, oils, fuels and lubricants based on the test
results
• Operation and Maintenance of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.
HEAT ENGINES LAB

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Flue gas analysis by Orsat apparatus.
2. Study and performance characteristics of steam turbine.
3. Dryness fraction of steam using calorimeters.
4. Performance characteristics of a constant speed air blower.
5. Verification of fan laws and static efficiency of air blower.
6. Test on Reciprocating compressor.
7. C.O.P. of a Refrigeration plant.
8. Performance test on A/C plant.
9. Testing of fuels - calorific value, proximate analysis
10. Testing of fuels - Ultimate analysis, octane number, cetane number.
11. Testing of lubricants - flash point, fire point, pour point.
12. Testing of lubricants- Viscosity index, corrosion stability, carbon residue.
13. Testing of lubricants - Mechanical stability, ash content.
14. Wind Tunnel - Drag and lift measurements.
15. Performance test on IC Engine as per BIS specifications.
BOILER CHEMISTRY LAB
16. To determine hardness content of the sample of boiler water in P.P.M. in terms of CaCO3.
17. To determine Chloride Content of the sample of water in P.P.M. in terms of CaCO3.
18. To determine Alkalinity due to Phenolphthaline, total Alk. and Caustic Alk. Of the sample of
water (in P.P.M).
19. To determine Phosphate Content of the sample of water.
20. To determine dissolved Oxygen content of the sample of water.
21. To determine sulphate content of given sample of water.
22. To determine Ph-value of the given sample of water.
23. Boiler trial.
24. Water Testing - Dissolved oxygen, total-dissolved solids, turbidity.
25. Water Analysis (Fresh and sea water)- Chloride, sulphate, hardness.
26. Sludges and scale deposit - Silica, volatile and non-volatile suspended matter.
REFRIGERATION LABORATORY
27. Watch keeping: Parameters to be monitored during running of refrigeration unit.
28. Various cut-outs, viz, pressure, temperature
29. Determination of actual COP, theoretical COP and Carnot COP.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To Perform various tests on the heat engines
CO2: To Analyze the results to understand the performance characteristics of Engines
CO3: To Perform Boiler water tests, Sea water and fresh water tests
CO4: To Choose the best water, oils, fuels and lubricants based on the test results.
REFERENCES:
2. Skelly.J.D, “Water Treatment”, Marine Engineering Practice , Vol-2 Part-14, IMarEST, London,
2004
3. Mathur, M.L., Sharma, R.P., “Internal Combustion Engines”, 7th Ed. Dhanpat rai Publications,
REPRINT 2002
4. Willard W. Pulkrabek, “Engineering Fundamentals of the Internal Combustion Engines”, 1st Ed.,
PHI Learnings Pvt. Ltd., 2011
5. Flanagan,G.T.H, ‘Marine Boilers”, 1st Ed. ,Elsevier, 1990
POS:
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO3 PO PO PO6 PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 4 5 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 2/2= 4/4=1 3/2=1. 2/2=1 2/2=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 2/2= 1/1= 1/1= 2/2=
1 5 1 1 1 1
MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
2. To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
3. To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
4. To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
5. To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types
UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and bearing, stern
tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods- water jet propulsion ,
screw propulsion.
UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9
Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster – Advantages,
various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer, bilge keel - stabilizing
and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water and sea water sailing vessel,
Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.
UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9

Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag, effects of
fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship, cavitations -
effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.
UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort nozzle,
ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade propellers and its
advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller - Thrust creation by
propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.
UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9
Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings- Rudder
pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits and demerits of
various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper, movement of rudders,
Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009
REFERENCES:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.

CO PO PSO
PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO PSO3 PSO4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 2/2= 4/4= 4/4= 2/2= 1/1= 1/1=1 2/2=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3511 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, ELECTRONICS AND MICRO L T P C

PROCESSOR LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart Practical knowledge in
• Operation and maintenance of Electrical Machines
• Operation and maintenance of electronic equipment’s
• Operation and maintenance of Microprocessor
ELECTRICAL ENGG. LABORATORY

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Load Test on D.C. Shunt Motor
2. Load Test on D.C.Series Motor
3. O.C.C. & load characteristic of self/separately excited D.C. Generator.
4. Parallel operation of D.C.Shunt Generator
5. Speed control of D.C.Shunt Motor.
6. Load O.C. & S.C. test on single-phase transformer.
7. Parallel operation of single-phase transformers.
8. To connect similar single-phase transformers in the following ways.
9. Y-Y, A-A, A-Y and Y-A.
10. Load Test on Squirrel cage induction motor
11. Load Test on Slip ring induction motor
12. Pole changing motor for various speeds.
13. Synchronization of 3-phase alternator.
14. Trouble shooting in Electric Motors and Transformers.
15. Exercises in Power Wiring and earthing.
ELECTRONICS / MICROPROCESSOR LABORATORY
1. To study the volt-ampere characteristics of a high current semiconductor diode.
2. To study the volt-ampere characteristics of a diode and Zener diode.
3. To study the half wave and full wave rectification circuit without and with filter circuit.
4. To study the volt-ampere characteristics of a Transistor.
5. To study the volt-ampere characteristics of Field Effect Transistor.
6. To study the characteristics of Silicon Control Rectifier.
7. To study the Transistor Feed Back Amplifier.
8. To study the Integrated Circuit operational amplifier.
9. To study the logic training board.
10. To study the speed control of D.C. motor using Thyristor.
11. Arithmetic operations using 8085
12. Logical operations using 8085
13. Array operations using 8085
14. Speed & Direction Control of Stepper motor using 8085.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Conducting all types of tests on the Shunt and Series Motors,
CO2: Load tests on the Transformers, parallel operation of single phase Transformers Synchronizing
three phase Alternators
CO3: Understanding the volt-ampere characteristics of Semiconductors, Diodes, Transistors, Field
Effect transistor, Amplifier, Thyristor and 8085 Microprocessor.
MV3512 MARINE MACHINERY DRAWING L T PC

0 0 42
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand and practice on
● Sketching and dimensioning
● Basic system of Limits, fits tolerance, Rivets and welding joint
● Marine Machinery Parts and components
UNIT I EXPLANATION AND SKETCHING 3+12

Dimensioning conventions of shafts, arcs, angles, holes, tapers, welded joints, threads and pipes
conventional representation of metals and materials. sectioning conventions, removed sections and
revolved sections, parts not usually sectioned, conventions of
gears
UNIT II LIMITS, FITS AND TOLERANCES 3+12

Limits and tolerances, Surface Finish, Type of fits – description, hole basis system and shaft basis
system, calculations involving minimum and maximum clearances for given combination of
tolerance grades- simple problems, geometric tolerances
UNIT III RIVETS AND JOINT 3+12

Sketching screw-threads, screwed fastenings, rivets and riveted joints keep. cotter joints & pin
joints.
UNIT IV MARINE MACHINERY PARTS 3+12

Drawing of machine components in assembly - details like couplings, glands, non-return valves,
cocks & plugs, cylinder, connecting rod & bearings. boiler mountings – full bore safety valve, gauge
glass, main stop valve.
UNIT V MARINE COMPONENT 3+12
Assembly drawings of simple marine components - bilge strainer boxes, control valves, cylinder
relief valves, boiler blow down cock.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand and explain the Limits, Fits and Tolerances, arcs etc., with respect to the Marine
Machinery.
CO2: Apply the knowledge to Sketch Valves, Cocks and Plugs.
CO3: Draw Various parts of Marine Machinery and the general Marine components
TEXT BOOKS:
1. MacGibbon’s “Pictorial Drawing Book for Marine Engineers-James”, 8th Edition, G.Holburn &
John J. Seaton, James Munro & Company Limited, Engineering and Nautical Publishers,
Mumbai, 1978.
2. Beck, H.G., “Engineering Drawings for Marine Engineers”, 2nd Ed., Reeds Vol 11, Adlard Coles
Nautical, London, 2012
3. N.D.Bhatt, “Machine Drawing”, 18th Edition, Charotar Publication, Mumbai, 2001.
REFERENCES
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Machine Drawing”, 17th Edition, Subhas Stores Books Corner, Bangalore,
2003.
2. Gill P.S., “A text book on Machine Drawing”, S.K. Kataria & sons, Mumbai, 2000.
3. Junnarkar,N.D., “Machine Drawing”,1st Ed. Pearson, 2004
4. Jindal, U.C., “Machine Drawing”, 1st Ed. Pearson, 2010
MV3601 STABILITY OF SHIPS L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart the Knowledge on the Basic Hydrostatics and Stability Calculations of Ship.
• To understand and apply the law of the Archimedes principle, floatation and displacement.
• To understand and calculate the Centre of gravity & effect of addition of mass.
• To determine the Meta centric Height, free surface effect and Carry out the Inclining
experiment.
• To derive the loss of stability due to grounding.
UNIT I HYDROSTATICS 12
Density, relative density, pressure exerted by a liquid on an immersed plane, center of pressure,
load on immersed plane, load diagram, shearing forces on bulk head stiffeners– problems.
UNIT II GEOMETRY AND SHIP FORM CALCULATION 12

Archimedes principle, Laws of floatation, displacement, tonne per cm immersion. Coefficients of
form, wetted surface area, similar figures, shearing force and bending moment – problems.
UNIT III CALCULATION OF AREA, VOLUME, FIRST AND SECOND 12

MOMENTS
Simpsons first rule and second rule, application to area and volume, use of intermediate ordinate
rule, trapezoidal rule, mean and mid – ordinate rule, application of 5,8, – 1 Rule for area, application
of simpson rule to first and second moments of area – Centre of gravity, effect of addition of mass,
effect of movement of mass, effect of suspended mass – problems.
UNIT IV TRANSVERSE STABILITY AND HEEL 12
Static stability at small angles of heel, calculation of BM and meta centric height, meta centric
diagram, inclining experiment, free surface effect, stability at large angles of heel, curves of static
stability, dynamic stability, angle of loll, stability of a wall sided ship –inclining experiment, problems.
IMO recommendations concerning ship stability.
UNIT V LONGITUDINAL STABILITY 12

Longitudinal BM – MCT1 cm – Change of trim, change of LCB with change of trim, alteration of trim
by adding or removing weights, mean draft, change in mean and end draft due to density and
bilging – flooding calculation – floodable length – factor of sub division – loss of stability due to
grounding – problems- Knowledge of Trim and stress tables and equipment’s.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Apply Knowledge to Calculate the Basic Hydrostatics and Stability Calculations of Ship.
CO2: Define the law of the Archimedes principle, floatation and displacement.
CO3: Able to interpret the stability data.
CO4: Use of Modern tools to calculate the Meta centric Height, free surface effect.
CO5: Determine the loss of stability due to grounding.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stokoe, E.A., “Reeds Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, 2nd Edition, Thomas Reed
Publications, London, 1982.
2. K.J. Rawson and E.C Tupper “Basic ship theory” volume – I & II – 5th edition Butterworth
and Heine Mann, London , 2001.
3. John Letcher Edited by J. Randolph Paulling, “Principles of Naval Architecture Series: The
Geometry of Ships”, 1st Ed. SNAME, 2009
REFERENCES
1. Rawson, K.J.Tupper E.C, “Basic Ship theory”, 5th Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann,
London, 2001.
2. G.N.Hatch, “Creative Naval Architecture”, 1st Edition, Thomas Reed Publications, London,
1971.
3. Kemp & Young Series, “Ship Stability Notes and Examples”,1st Ed. , Stanford Maritime
Limited, 1998
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 2/2= 4/4= 3/2=1. 2/2= 2/2= 1/1= 1/1= 2/2= 1/1=1 1/1=1 2/2=1
1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1
NX3651 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course - III LT P C
3 00 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
ARMED FORCES 3
AF 2 Modes of Entry to Army, CAPF, Police 3
COMMUNICATION 3
C1 Introduction to Communication & Latest Trends 3
INFANTRY 3
INF 1 Organisation of Infantry Battalion & its weapons 3
MILITARY HISTORY 23
MH 1 Biographies of Renowned Generals 4
MH 2 War Heroes - PVC Awardees 4
MH 3 Study of Battles - Indo Pak War 1965, 1971 & Kargil 9
MH 4 War Movies 6
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
NX3652 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course - III L T P C
3 0 0 3
NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
NO 3 Modes of Entry - IN, ICG, Merchant Navy 3
AF 2 Naval Expeditions & Campaigns 3
NAVAL COMMUNICATION 2
NC 1 Introduction to Naval Communications 1
NC 2 Semaphore 1
NAVIGATION 2
N1 Navigation of Ship - Basic Requirements 1
N2 Chart Work 1
SEAMANSHIP 15
MH 1 Introduction to Anchor Work 2
MH 2 Rigging Capsule 6
MH 3 Boatwork - Parts of Boat 2
MH 4 Boat Pulling Instructions 2
MH 5 Whaler Sailing Instructions 3
FIRE FIGHTING FLOODING & DAMAGE CONTROL 4
FFDC 1 Fire Fighting 2
FFDC 2 Damage Control 2
SHIP MODELLING 3
SM Ship Modelling Capsule 3
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
NX3653 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - III LTPC
300 3
AIRMANSHIP 1
A1 Airmanship 1
BASIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 3
FI 1 Basic Flight Instruments 3
AERO MODELLING 3
AM 1 Aero Modelling Capsule 3
GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 2
GSK 4 Latest Trends & Acquisitions 2
AIR CAMPAIGNS 6
AC 1 Air Campaigns 6
PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT 6
PF 1 Principles of Flight 3
PF 2 Forces acting on Aircraft 3
NAVIGATION 5
NM 1 Navigation 2
NM 2 Introduction to Met and Atmosphere 3
AERO ENGINES 6
E1 Introduction and types of Aero Engine 3
E2 Aircraft Controls 3
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MV3611 FIRE FIGHTING, CONTROLS AND SIMULATOR L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
● To impart Practical knowledge of fire fighting
● To understand and practice hydraulic and pneumatic control systems on board ship
● To train the students in simulator for the operation of Marine Machinery fitted on board ship
MARINE ENGINEERING FIRE FIGHTING LABORATORY

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Fire hazard aboard ships – inflammability, fire extinguishing use. Control of class A,
B & C fires.
2. Fire protection built in ships, extinction systems, and escape means.
3. System for tankers, statutory requirements for fire fighting systems and equipment’s
on different vessels.
4. Fire fighting equipment: fire pumps, hydrants and hoses, couplings, nozzles and
International shore connection, Construction, Operation and merits of different types
of portable extinguishers.
5. Non-portable and fixed fire extinguishers, installation for ships. Properties of
chemical used, bulk carbon-di-oxide, and inert gas systems.
6. Firemen outfit its use and care, maintenance, testing and recharging of appliances,
preparation, and fire appliance survey.
7. Fire Control: Action required and practical techniques adopted for extinguishing fires
in accommodation, machinery spaces, boiler rooms, Cargo holds, galley etc.,
8. Fire fighting in port and dry dock. Procedure for re-entry after putting off fire, rescue
operations from affected compartments.
9. First aid, Fire organisation on ships. Fire signal and muster.
10. Fire drill.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Prevent, detect, and extinguish different types of fire onboard ship and provide first aid.
CO2: Operate Hydraulic and Pneumatic control equipment, systems and components.
CO3: Start, Operate of Marine Machinery and Watch keeping onboard ship.
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory Manual
2. M.G. Stavitsky, V.I. Vostryakov, M.F.Kortunov, V.I. Martynenko & V.M. Sidoryok., “Fire
Fighting Aboard ships Vol. I & Vol. II, Structural Design and Fire Extinguishing System”, 1st
Ed. Gulf publishing company, Houston, London, 1983.
3. Frank Rush Brook, “Fire Aboard”, 3rd Edition, Brown, son & Ferguson Ltd., Glassgow 1988.
PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC CONTROL LABORATORY
1. Symbols of Hydraulics
2. Hydraulic Power Pack
3. Double acting Cylinder Operation 4/3 Direct Control valve
4. Pilot operated check valve.
5. Speed control of cylinder with throttle valve.
6. To study the cracking pressure pilot operated check valve.
7. Meter-in-Circuit.
8. Meter - Out-Circuit
9. Bleed of Circuit
10. Direct operated relief valve.
11. Hydraulic motor operation.
12. Speed variation of hydraulic motor.
13. Sequence Circuit.
14. Symbols in Pneumatics.
15. Single acting cylinder with 3/2 Valve.
16. Quick exhaust Valve.
17. Time Delay circuit.
18. Impulse operation of single acting cylinder
19. Impulse operation of double acting cylinder
20. Pressure switch operation pneumatic system
21. Series connection of electro pneumatic Contacts
22. Parallel connection of electro pneumatic Contacts
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory manual
2. Shanmuga Sundram, “Hydraulics and Pneumatics Controls”, S. Chand group, 2010
SIMULATOR LAB. EXPERIMENTS

1. Description of basic engine functions and their simulation.
2. Manual Method of operation of engine from engine room station.
3. Engine operation from Remote stations – i.e. engine control room and Navigation
Bridge.
4. Safety and interlocks in UMS – ships and effect of malfunction of main engine
auxiliaries.
5. Electronic logic circuits in remote control stations.
6. Simulation of engine functions in logic circuits.
7. Study and adjustments of Logic circuits for remote control operation of main engine
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory Manual
2. Original Equipment (Simulator) Manufacturers manual
3. Ganesan,V., “Computer Simulation of Compression – Ignition Engine Processes”,1st Ed.,
Universities Press, Reprint 2013
4. Ganesan, V., “Computer Simulation of Spark – Ignition Engine Processes”,1st Ed., Universities
Press, Reprint 2013
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
MV3612 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY LTPC

0042
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
● To impart knowledge on the use of Measuring Techniques
● To practice on measuring equipment and instruments
● To study the use of strain gauge (LVDT), accelerometer and vibro meter.
MEASUREMENT LABORATORY
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Use of precision measuring instruments like micrometer, vernier, height and depth gauges,
surface plate, etc.
2. Checking dimensions of a part using slip gauge.
3. Use of sine bar for measuring angles and tapers.
4. Measurement of tooth thickness by gear tooth vernier.
5. Calibration of dial gauge.
6. Taper and bore measurement-using spheres.
7. Fundamental dimension of a gear using contour projector.
8. Testing squareness of a try square using slip gauges.
9. Checking straightness of a surface plate using autocollimator.
10. Measurement of angles between centre lines of holes drilled radially on a shaft.
11. Measurements of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer.
12. Use of pneumatic comparator and mechanical comparator.
INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
1. Pressure measuring devices-pressure and vacuum gauge calibration.
2. Temperature measuring devices like Platinum resistance thermometer, thermocouple,
radiation pyrometer, etc.
3. Flow measuring devices like orifice meter, rotameter, etc.
4. Speed measuring devices like tachometer, stroboscope, etc.
5. Force measuring devices, load cells and proving rings.
6. Torque measuring devices
7. Power measurement using rope, prony brake, mechanical, hydraulic and electrical
dynamometers.
8. displacement devices-strain gauge indicator, LVDT.
9. velocity and acceleration-accelerometer.
10. vibration devices-vibrometer.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Demonstrate the measuring techniques on marine equipment
CO2: Measure the parameters of on board ship devices
CO3: Display the concept of measuring displacement vibration acceleration
MV3701 SHIP OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT L T P C

AND IMO REQUIREMENTS 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• To impart knowledge on shipping company structure and registration procedure of ship
• To understand commercial shipping practices
• To familiarize marine insurance principles
• To understand on statutory regulation
• To understand and remember STCW convention for seafarer
UNIT I STRUCTURE OF A SHIPPING COMPANY 9

Structure of a shipping company and functioning of its various departments, ownership of vessels,
registration of ships, flags of convenience, IMO identification number. Maritime Declarations of Health
and the requirements of the International Health Regulations.
UNIT II COMMERCIAL SHIPPING PRACTICE 9

Planning sailing schedules and voyage estimates, liner and tramp shipping services, conference
systems, chartering and charter parties, ship’s papers for arrival and departure, port procedures, role
of agents, theory of freight rates, bills of lading, , cargo surveys and note of protests, International
labour organization (ILO) and Maritime Labour Convention,2006,COLREG 1972
UNIT III MARINE INSURANCE 9

Underwriting and loss adjusting principles applied to Marine cargo insurance, hull / machinery policy,
particular average, general average, P & I Clubs – making claims.
UNIT IV STATUTORY REGULATIONS 9

IMO Conventions, legislations, MARPOL acts and conventions, annexes I to VI, SOLAS 1974 and
amendments, main objectives, overview of all chapters and articles with an emphasis on ISM and
ISPS codes,. Maritime security policy, security responsibilities, vessel security assessment, security
equipment, threat identification vessel security actions and security administration. Load Lines
Convention 1966, Tonnage Convention 1969.
Responsibilities under International Instruments Affecting the Safety of the Ships, Passengers, Crew
or Cargo, Ballast Water Management, Classification Societies and Survey of Ship.
UNIT V STCW 9
International convention on STCW for seafarers 1978 with 1995 amendments, an overview of all
sections, manning of ships, engagement and discharge of ship’s crew, ship’s articles, Merchant
shipping act, Role of Maritime administration(DGS) and its functions: DGS Rules and MS Notices Port
state control, PSC mandatory certificate check list, grounds for PSC inspection criteria for detention.
Emergency Preparedness, drills and exercises, ERM(engine room resource management)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain about shipping company structure.
CO2: Plan voyage schedule and estimate the cost
CO3: Apply knowledge on marine insurance
CO4: To practices on statutory regulation
CO5: Apply international convention while carrying out watch keeping on board
TEXT BOOKS:
1. E.F. Stevens & C.S.J. Butterfield “Shipping Practice” 11th Edition, Sterling Book House, Mumbai,
1999.
2. John.M.Downard, “Ship Management Series - Managing Ships”, I Edition, Fairplay Publications,
Coulsdon, Surrey - 1990.
3. Capt.Dara E Driver, “Advanced Shipboard Management”, I Edition, Rumar Publications, Mumbai,
1985.
REFERENCES
1. Nilima, M.Chanidiramani, “Carriage of goods by Sea and Multimodal Transport”, 1st Edition,
Saptarang Publication, Mumbai, 1996.
2. SOLAS – 1974 - International Maritime Organisation Publications
3. MARPOL – 1973/78 - International Maritime Organisation Publications
4. STCW -1978/95 - International Maritime Organisation Publications
5. G.Raghuram, “Shipping Management”, 1st Edition, Vasant J.Sheth Memorial Foundation, Delhi,
1992
6. Pinto, “Maritime Law”, Bhandarkar Publications, 1998
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 3/3= 2/2= 5/5= 1/1= 4/4= 3/3= 5/5= 2/2= 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 =1
MV3702 MARINE VEHICLES PERFORMANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• To impart the knowledge to students on
• Various resistance applied on ship at sea
• Propeller Theory
• Rudder types experiments and trails.
• Theory of Waves
• Ship Vibration & Noise
UNIT I RESISTANCE 9
Types of resistance, frictional, residuary - wave making, eddy and form resistances and total
resistance, air, appendage, model testing, propeller tests in open water, admiralty coefficient, fuel
coefficient and consumption, sea trials – Problems.
UNIT II PROPELLER THEORY 9

Types and theory of propellers, apparent slip, real slip, wake, thrust, relation between powers and
speed, measurement of pitch, cavitations, built and solid propellers, interaction between the ship and
propeller, hull efficiency over all propulsive efficiency – problems. Bow Thruster and its usage
UNIT III RUDDER THEORY 9

Types of rudders, model experiments and manouvering trials, area and shape of rudder, position of
rudder, bow rudders vs stern rudder, forces on rudder, torque on stock, angle of heel, due to force on
rudder and angle of heel when turning – problems.
UNIT IV WAVE THEORY 9

Theory of waves, trochoidal waves, relationship between line of orbit centres and the undisturbed
surface, sinusoidal wave, Irregular wave pattern, wave spectra, wave amplitudes, rolling in unresisting
media, rolling in resisting media, practical aspects of rolling, Anti rolling devices, forces caused by
rolling, pitching, heaving and yawing.
UNIT V SHIP VIBRATION & NOISE 9

Hull vibration, Engine vibration, vibration of shafting system, engine noise reduction.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Determine the Ship’s Resistance while sailing.
CO2: Distinguish between the Ship’s Propeller and its types.
CO3: Distinguish between the Ship’s Rudder and its types.
CO4: Understand the students about Wave theory.
CO5: Acquire the knowledge about ship vibration & noise.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. “Principles of Naval Architecture”, SNAME Publication, 2000
2. Eric C. Tupper, “Introduction to Naval Architecture”, 3rd Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann,
London, 2001.
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds Publications, 2000
REFERENCES:
1. R. Battacharjee, ”Dynamics of Marine vehicles “SNAME Publication, year
2. Srikant Bhave, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson, 2010
3. Malcolm, J. Crocker, “Handbook of Noise and Vibration Control”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007
4. Singiresu S. Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson, 4th Ed., Pearson, 2013
5. K.J. Rawson and E.C. Tupper, “Basic Ship Theory” (Vol. II), 5th Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2001.
6. John Carlton, “Marine Propellers and Propulsion”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2012.
CO PO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO PSO
0 1 2 3 4
1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 2 1 1 1 1
4 2 1 1 1 1
5 2 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 10/ 5/5 3/3 1/1 2/2= 4/4= 5/5= 1/1=
5=1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1
GE3791 HUMAN VALUES AND ETHICS LT P C
2 0 0 2
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course aims to provide a broad understanding about the modern values and ethical principles that
have evolved and are enshrined in the Constitution of India with regard to the democratic, secular and
scientific aspects. The course is designed for undergraduate students so that they could study,
understand and apply these values in their day to day life.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
➢ To create awareness about values and ethics enshrined in the Constitution of India
➢ To sensitize students about the democratic values to be upheld in the modern society.
➢ To inculcate respect for all people irrespective of their religion or other affiliations.
➢ To instill the scientific temper in the students’ minds and develop their critical thinking.
➢ To promote sense of responsibility and understanding of the duties of citizen.
UNIT I DEMOCRATIC VALUES 6

Understanding Democratic values: Equality, Liberty, Fraternity, Freedom, Justice, Pluralism, Tolerance,
Respect for All, Freedom of Expression, Citizen Participation in Governance – World Democracies:
French Revolution, American Independence, Indian Freedom Movement.
Reading Text: Excerpts from John Stuart Mills’ On Liberty
UNIT II SECULAR VALUES 6

Understanding Secular values – Interpretation of secularism in Indian context - Disassociation of state
from religion – Acceptance of all faiths – Encouraging non-discriminatory practices.
Reading Text: Excerpt from Secularism in India: Concept and Practice by Ram Puniyani
UNIT III SCIENTIFIC VALUES 6

Scientific thinking and method: Inductive and Deductive thinking, Proposing and testing Hypothesis,
Validating facts using evidence based approach – Skepticism and Empiricism – Rationalism and Scientific
Temper.
Reading Text: Excerpt from The Scientific Temper by Antony Michaelis R
UNIT IV SOCIAL ETHICS 6

Application of ethical reasoning to social problems – Gender bias and issues – Gender violence – Social
discrimination – Constitutional protection and policies – Inclusive practices.
Reading Text: Excerpt from 21 Lessons for the 21st Century by Yuval Noah Harari
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC ETHICS 6

Transparency and Fairness in scientific pursuits – Scientific inventions for the betterment of society -
Unfair application of scientific inventions – Role and Responsibility of Scientist in the modern society.
Reading Text: Excerpt from American Prometheus: The Triumph and Tragedy of J.Robert
Oppenheimer by Kai Bird and Martin J. Sherwin.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
CO1 : Identify the importance of democratic, secular and scientific values in harmonious functioning of
social life
CO2 : Practice democratic and scientific values in both their personal and professional life.
CO3 : Find rational solutions to social problems.
CO4 : Behave in an ethical manner in society
CO5 : Practice critical thinking and the pursuit of truth.
REFERENCES:
1. The Nonreligious: Understanding Secular People and Societies, Luke W. Galen Oxford University
Press, 2016.
2. Secularism: A Dictionary of Atheism, Bullivant, Stephen; Lee, Lois, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. The Oxford Handbook of Secularism, John R. Shook, Oxford University Press, 2017.
4. The Civic Culture: Political Attitudes and Democracy in Five Nations by Gabriel A. Almond and Sidney
Verba, Princeton University Press,
5. Research Methodology for Natural Sciences by Soumitro Banerjee, IISc Press, January 2022
MV3711 PROJECT WORK L T P C

0 0 6 3
OBJECTIVE:
● To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and literature review
till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports and to
face reviews and viva voce examination.
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
The project can be of working model, PC based training module and theoretical design and analysis.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department under the
guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing the work
to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of
three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project
report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated based on oral
presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners constituted by the Head
of the Department.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the project work students will be able to:
CO1: Analyze engineering the complex problems
CO2: Demonstrate Marine engineering competency skills
CO3: Finding solution by formulating proper methodology.
MV3811 MARINE WORKSHOP PRACTICAL AND AFLOAT TRAINING L T P C

0 0 48* 18
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge, skill and to train the students to be able to perform as Engineer officer on board
ships.
*The students are required to undergo Marine Workshop Training in DG Shipping approved Marine
Engineering Workshop for a duration of 6 months. The training should be as per the Merchant
Shipping (Standard of Training Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers) Rule 1998.
Competency on - use of hand tools used for marine equipment’s for dismantling, maintenance, repair
and reassembly of shipboard equipment’s.
100 hrs.
Competency on - use of hand tools used for electrical and electronic equipment’s, measuring and
test equipment’s for locating and repairing faults and malfunctions.
100 hrs.
Competency on - Operation of Main and Auxiliary machinery and associated control systems.
30 hrs.
Competency on - Operating pumping systems & associated control systems. 90 hrs.
Competency on - Operating alternators, generators & control systems. 100 hrs.
Competency on - Maintaining alternators, generators and Control systems. 20 hrs.
Competency on - Maintaining Marine Engineering system including control systems (overhauling
and maintenance of Marine Diesel Engines, air compressors, heat exchangers,
oil separators etc.,)
700 hrs.
Competency on - Controlling and fighting fire onboard. 6 hrs.
Competency on - Operation of life saving appliances. 6 hrs.
------------
Total hrs. of Training: 1152 hrs.
------------
The competency of the students are evaluated by the Marine Engineering Workshop and a report is
sent to the college. During the training the students have to maintain a work dairy. After completion of
this training the students will be examined as follows:
a) Assessment on work diary (Internal) 200 Marks.
b) *(i) Written test for 1 hour. 10 questions 10 X 10 = 100 Marks
(ii) Viva voce 200 Marks
--------------
Total 500 Marks
--------------
* Valuation by both Internal and External Examiners.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the work shop training the students are expected to have acquired the sufficient
knowledge
CO1: In operation, maintenance, repair and refit of Marine machines viz. main engine, auxiliary
engines,
CO2: In operation, maintenance, repair and refit of Auxiliaries such as Compressors, Pumps,
Steering gear, distillation plant, incinerator, sewage treatment plant etc.,
CO3: In using hand tools, electrical and electronic equipment’s,
CO4: In using Measuring and Testing Equipment’s for locating faults, malfunctions
CO5: In repairing faults and malfunctions
CO6: In operation, maintenance, repair and refit of Marine Electrical machines such as
Alternators, Generators, Motors, Stabilizers
CO7: Overhauling and maintenance of heat exchangers, oil separators, filters etc.
CO8: Of Firefighting and Lifesaving Methods
CO9: On maintenance of systems and controls
REFERENCES:
1. Original Equipment Manufacturers Manuals for On Board Equipments
2. Benedict, “Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes”, 1st Ed. taylor & Francis, Indian reprint 2011
3. Bloch, “Machinery Component Maintenance and Repair”,3rd Ed. Elsevier, Indian Reprint 2010,
4. Youssef, “Machining Technology”, 1st Vol., Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint 2012 (Yesdee
5. Paulin.D.S, Fowler.D.J., “Steering Gear” Marine Engineering Practice, Vol 1, Part 09, IMarEST,
London, Reprint 1997
6. Wright.A.A, “ Exhaust Emission From Combustion Machinery”, Marine Engineering Practice, Vol
3, Part 20, IMarEST, London, 2000
7. Leigh Jones, Chris., “A Practical Guide to Marine Fuel Oil Handling,” Marine Engineering Practice,
Vol 3, Part 19, IMarEST, London, 2008
8. Henshall. S.H, “Marine Medium Speed Diesel Engines,” Marine Engineering Practice, Vol 1, Part
03, IMarEST, London, Reprint 1998
9. Norris.A, “Prime Movers for Generation of Electricity(A) Steam Turbines”, Marine Engineering
10. Sterling.L, “Selection Installation & Maintenance of Marine Compressors”, Marine Engineering
11. Gopalakrishnan & Banerji, “Maintenance and Spare Parts Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2010
12. Mishra and Pathak, “Maintenance Engineering and Management,” 2nd Ed., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2012
13. Venkataraman, “Maintenance Engineering and Management,” 1st Ed., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2010
14. Alan Rowen, Raymond Gardner, Jose Femenia, David Chapman, and Edwin Wiggins,
“Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering”,1st Ed.,SNAME, 2005
15. Roy L. Harrington, “Marine Engineering”, 1st. Ed., SNAME, 1992
16. GTH. Flanagan, “Marine Boilers” 3rd Edition, Butter worth, London, 2001.
17. K.M.B. Donald, “Marine Steam Turbines”, 1st Edition, Institute of Marine Engineers, London,
1977.
18. L.Jackson & T.D. Morton, “General Engineering Knowledge for Marine Engineers”, 4th Edition,
Thomas Reeds Publication, United Kingdom, 1986.
19. Norris.A, “Operation of Machinery in Ships Steam Turbines, Boilers”, Marine Engineering Practice,
Vol 2, Part 15, IMarEST, London, Reprint 2000
20. Edmund G.R, Kraallavers , “Advanced Electo-technology For Marine Engineers”, 2nd Ed. Reeds
Vol 07, Adlard Coles Nautical, London, 1999
21. W.Laws, “Electricity Applied To Marine Engineering”, 4th edition, The Institute Of Marine Engineers,
London, 1998.
MV3001 SHIP LOGISTICS AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge to the students on:
• International trade logistics and supply chain management
• Block chain Technology
• Role of logistics service provider’s role of logistics service providers supply chain design and
strategy
• Supply chain design and strategy
• Warehousing
UNIT I INTERNATIONAL TRADE LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 9

Definition of trade, logistics and supply chain management, supply chain partners in international
trade - role of supply chain partners in international trade, types of international trade, cost
composition of product in terms of materials and taxes based on Indian environment.
UNIT II BLOCKCHAIN TECHNOLOGY 9

Emerging models for Block Chain Technology, how Block chain technology affects supply chain –
supply chain finance - Application Programming Interface (APIs) for trade finance, Managing
Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable with Block chain
UNIT III ROLE OF LOGISTICS SERVICE PROVIDERS 9
International lsp types air and sea - role identification – process of lsp offers- negotiation – importance
of statutory regulation like service tax etc., on - transportation, warehousing and packaging types and
process – related statutory regulations.
UNIT IV SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN AND STRATEGY 9

How drivers of supply chain interfaced in imports and exports – demand forecasting and budgeting
process - pricing of product and services - performance measurement - bull whip effect - outsourcing -
role of outsourcing in international supply chain. Co-ordination in a international supply chain: how
JIT, VMI and other inventory control operation in ISCM, - reverse logistics in international supply chain
- commercial payment process - risk management - commercial and cargo risk
UNIT V WAREHOUSING 9
Definition-nature and importance-role of warehousing in logistic system-types-basic components-
functions-warehousing layout and design-warehousing decisions & operations-warehouse
productivity. Packaging-importance-advantages objectives and principles-types of packaging
materials used-bar coding.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students will be able to:
CO1: Identify the nature of international trade logistics & supply chain management
CO2: Explain the need and role for block chain technology
CO3: Examine the different Logistics Service Providers
CO4: Discuss the importance of supply chain design and strategy
CO5: Apprise the relevance of warehouse with respect to supply chain management
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Text Book of Logistics and Supply Chain Management, D.K.Agrawal
2. Datt & Sundharam’s Indian Economy, 72nd Edition, S Chand, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Elements of Shipping – Alan E. Branch - Routledge- Special Indian Edition
2. Export Management – P. K. Khurana – Galgotia Publishing Company, New Delhi.

CO PO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
10 11 12
1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 2
3 1 1 3 1
4 1 1
5 1 1 3 1
Avg 1 1 - 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1.5
MV3002 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To Impart Knowledge to the students on
• Language components essential to face competitive examinations
• Specific patterns in Language Testing
• Respective skills to Tackle verbal reasoning
• Respective skills to Tackle verbal ability tests.
• Language-learning usage accuracy of grammar and coherence in writing.
UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal reasoning
- Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage – Synonyms-antonyms –
Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly confused words –Spellings –
Word expansion – New words in use.
UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences –
Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement – Voice
– Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.
UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarizing – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences- Critical reading
UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mind map - Describing pictures and facts -Paragraph structure –
organizing points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types of
essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose – Structure,
Content and Style.
UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and intonation
- Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases – Interactive
communication – Dyes fluency -Sentence stress –Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions – Giving an
oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself -Utterance –
Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Expand their vocabulary knowledge skill sets.
CO2: Gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range of texts with the emphasis
required
CO3: Identify errors with precision.
CO4: Write with clarity and coherence
CO5: understand the importance of task fulfillment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2010.

CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO12 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 2
3 1 1 1 2 2
4 1 1 1 2
5 1 1 1 2
Avg 3/2 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 3/2 1/1 4/2 1/1 4/2 4/2 2/1
=1.5 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1. =1 =2 =1 =2 =2 =2
5
MV3003 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Global Management -Theory and Practice
• Planning and Decision Making
• Organizing and Staffing
• Leadership and Motivation
• Controlling and Control techniques
UNIT I GLOBAL MANAGEMENT -THEORY AND PRACTICE 9

Definition of Management– Nature- Purpose- Science or Art- Development of Management Thought–
Contribution of Henry Fayol and F W Taylor- Approaches to Management- Functions of Managers-
Social responsibility of Managers– Ethics in managing- International management- MNCs- Country
alliances- Cultural differences- Porter’s competitive advantage of Nations.
UNIT II PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING 9

Planning: Essentials of planning- Types- Planning process- Objectives- Management by Objectives-
Strategies- Policies and planning premises- Blue ocean strategy - Portfolio matrix- Premising and
Forecasting. Decision Making: Importance- Limitations of rational decision making- Evaluation of
alternatives- Selection of alternative–three approaches- Programmed and nonprogrammed decisions-
Creativity and Innovation.
UNIT III ORGANIZING AND STAFFING 9

Organizing: Nature- Formal and informal organization- Entrepreneuring and Reengineering
Organization structure-process- Departmentation- Strategic Business Units (SBU)- Line/Staff
authority- Empowerment- Functional Authority Decentralization– Delegation- Effective organizing-
Avoiding conflict by clarification- Organizational culture.
Staffing: Definition- Systems approach to staffing- Human Resource Management - Selection
process- techniques and instruments- Performance appraisal-appraisal criteria- Team evaluation
approach-applying performance review software- Formulating career strategy- Training of Managers-
Organizational dynamics- Managing change and organizational conflict.
UNIT IV LEADERSHIP AND MOTIVATION 9

Leading: Definition- Approaches to Leadership- Leadership Styles-Trait Theories-Committees, Teams
and Group decision making- Personality- Perception- Individual and group behavior- Cognitive
dissonance theory- Human factors and Motivation-Theories of Motivation- McGregor’s theory X and
theory Y- Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory- ERG theory- Herzberg’s theory- Expectancy theory-
Equity Theory-McClelland’s needs theory- Motivational Techniques-Job enrichment.
UNIT V CONTROLLING AND CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9

Controlling function- Basic control process- Critical control points-standards- Control as a feedback
system- Control of overall performance- Profit & Loss Control-Control through ROI-Management
Audits-Balanced score card-effective control. Control techniques: Budget as a control Device-Time-
event Network analysis and analytics in Managing-Use of computers in handling information- Digital
economy, ecommerce and m-Commerce-Tools to improve productivity and TQM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Function as successful managers.
CO2: Plan and make appropriate decision.
CO3: Organize resources
CO4: Demonstrate Leadership qualities.
CO5: Apply control techniques
TEXT BOOKS:
1. KOONTZ, H. & HEINZ, W. (2012) Essentials of Management: An International and Leadership
Perspective. 9th edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. ROBBINS, S.P., & DAVID, A. D, (2009) Fundamentals of Management: Essential Concepts and
Applications. 6th edition, Pearson Education.
REFERENCES:
1. WEIHRICH, H., MARK, V. C. & HAROLD, K. (2010) Management: A Global and
Entrepreneurial Perspective. 13th Edition, Tata McGraw Hills.
2. RAO, V.S.P. & KRISHNA, H. (2009) Management: Text and Cases. Excel Books.
3. TRIPATHY, P. C., & REDDY, P. N. (2008) Principles of Management. Tata McGraw Hills.
4. MICHAEL, A. H., STEWART J. B., & LYMAN, W. P. (2008) Management.

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3004 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Perspectives in human Resource Management
• Human Resource Planning and Recruitment
• Training and Development
• Employee Engagement
• Performance Evaluation and Control
UNIT I PERSPECTIVES IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9

Evolution of human resource management – The importance of the human capital – Role of human
resource manager – Challenges forhumanresourcemanagers-trendsinHumanresourcepolicies–
Computerapplicationsinhumanresourcemanagement–Humanresourceaccountingandaudit.
UNIT II HUMANRESOURCE PLANNING AND RECRUITMENT 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Forecasting human resource requirement –matching
supply and demand - Internal and External sources - Organizational Attraction-. Recruitment,
Selection, Induction and Socialization-Theories, Methods and Process.
UNIT III TRAININGAND DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of training methods –purpose- benefits- resistance. Executive development programme –
Common practices-Benefits–Self-development–Knowledge management.
UNITIV EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Application of theories of motivation – Career
management–Mentoring-Development of mentor – Protégé relationships-Job Satisfaction, Employee
Engagement, and Organizational Citizenship Behavior: Theories, Models.
UNITV PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Method of performance evaluation – Feedback – Industry practices. Promotion, Demotion, Transfer
and Separation – Implication of job change. The control process – Importance – Methods –
Requirement of effective control systems grievances – Causes – Implications – Redressal methods.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of course the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on the various aspects of HRM.
CO2: Understand the knowledge needed for human resources professional.
CO3: Develop the skills needed for a successful HR Manager
CO4: To apply the concepts learned in the workplace.
CO5: Be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM
REFERENCES:
1. Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management,14th Edition, Pearson
EducationLimited,2015.
2. DavidA. Decenzo, Stephen.P. Robbins, and Susan L.Verhulst, Human Resource Management,
Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014.
3. LuisR. Gomez - Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert LCardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
4. Bernadin, Human Resource Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 8th edition 2012.
5. Wayne Cascio, Managing Human Resource, McGraw Hill, 2015.
6. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management, McGraw Hill 2012.
7. Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012.

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 2/2=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 1/1=1 2/2=1 2/2=1 2/2=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 3/3=1 1/1=1 1/1=1 2/2=1 2/2=1 2/2=1
MV3005 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND WATCH KEEPING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge to the student’s in
• Safe watch keeping
• Trouble shooting in auxiliary machineries
• Trouble shooting in Main engine
• maintenance of engine components
• Watch-keeping of Engine Room in various types of ships and to prepare for Class
IV MOT Examination
UNIT I SAFE WATCH KEEPING 9
Definition of watch, operating principles, requirements of watch keeping, requirements of certification,
duties of engineer officers – operation of engine room in general, log book writing – watch keeping
under way – watch keeping at port – at unsheltered anchorage, fitness for duty, preparation of Diesel
Engines for a long voyage – bad weather precautions, safe working practices – during overhauling at
port, and during bad weather, change over from diesel oil to heavy oil and vice versa.
Trouble shooting during watch keeping: Emergency measures taken in case of –flooding of engine
room, engine room bilge fire, general fire, In case of any system failure or breakage of pipe lines, etc.
UNIT II TROUBLE SHOOTING IN AUXILIARY MACHINERIES 9

Malfunctioning, partial or total failure of auxiliary machineries – such as, auxiliary engines, purifiers,
heat exchangers, air compressors, reefer and air conditioning compressors and systems, boilers and
accessories, fresh water generators, hydrophore tanks and systems, all pumps & systems.
Repairs and maintenance of propeller, rudder, dry-docking methods, dry-docking inspection and repair
works.
UNIT III TROUBLE SHOOTING IN MAIN ENGINE 9

Trouble shooting related to various types of marine diesel engines and condition monitoring – causes,
effects, remedies and prevention of engine not turning on Air and Fuel, knocking at TDC and BDC,
black smoke in funnel, poor compression and combustion, early or advanced injection, turbocharger
surging, scavenge fire, Air starting line explosion, crank case explosion, exhaust uptake fire, failure of
bottom end bolts.
UNIT IV MAINTENANCE OF ENGINE COMPONENTS 9
Checking of holding down bolts, resin chocking – Tie-rods tensioning, checking and tightening of
2-stroke and 4-stroke bottom end bolts.
Inspection and maintenance of crankshaft and cam shaft, dismantle inspection and reassemble of
main bearings, cross head bearings & bottom end bearings, connecting rod, piston and piston
assembly, stuffing box, cylinder head and all mountings, governor and over speed trip – checking of
all clearances, adjustments, effect of improper clearances, prevention and rectification.
Cylinder liner and cylinder lubrication, thrust bearing, running gears inspection, engine alignment,
chains drive adjustment and tensioning.
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL MACHINERIES 9

Circuit testing, shore supply arrangement, maintenance of circuit breakers, transformers, electrical
motors, navigational lights, batteries, starters, electrical equipments, maintenance of switchboard.
Maintenance of electrical equipments in oil tankers, LNG / LPG carriers.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Carry out safe Watch-keeping in various ships.
CO2: Understand STCW standards of training, requirements of officers and ratings.
CO3: Identify Trouble shooting in auxiliary machineries
CO4: Maintain and repair Electrical machineries.
CO5: Prevention, rectification and maintenance with respect electrical machineries to trouble shooting
of machineries.
TEXT BOOKS:
1.Vikram Gokhale &N.Nanda,” Marine Engineering Practice and Ship safety and Environmental
protection”, 3rd Edition, Engee Enterprises Mumbai, 2002.
2.Sulzer brothers, “Sumitomo – Sulzer Diesel Engines”, Service Instruction for Sumitomo Sulzer
Diesel Engines RND Sumitomo ship building & Machining co., Ltd., Japan.
3. Heinz P. Bloch, Fred K. Geitner, “Machinery Component Maintenance and Repair” 3rd Ed. An
imprint of Elsevier,2010
REFERENCES
1.IME Manuals and Ship’s Marine Manuals.
2.Manual instruction for MAN Diesel Engine and spare parts, 1968.
3.Instruction Manual for Mitsui – B & W Diesel Engine data, Mitsui Engineering & Ship
Building co., Mitsui B & W, 1976.
4.Manual De Maintenance & operation MAN type K.270 120E DMR.
5.Daihatsu Diesel Engine instruction book, Operation & maintenance manual for
Daihatsu Diesel Engine Model – DV26, Model 6 PKT – TB-16.
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
Avg 4/4 1/1 2/2 3/3 4/4 1/1 1/1= 1/1= 1/1= 1/1= 1/1= 3/3=
=1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3006 SHIP SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• Learn precautions required for oil tanker operations.

• Learn about MARPOL 73/78 requirements and Safe Working Practices.
• Learn and Understand Life Saving and Survival at Sea techniques.
• Learn about IMO, its conventions and statutory certificates of ships.
• To understand Personnel Management, Training and Emergency drills of ships
UNIT I OIL POLLUTION PREVENTION 9

Pollution of the Marine environment while bunkering, loading/discharging oil cargo – tank cleaning –
pumping out bilges etc., - knowledge of construction and operation of oil pollution prevention
equipment in engine room and on tankers.
UNIT II LEGISLATIONS 9
MARPOL 73/78 and other country legislations like OPA-90 MARPOL equipment – Knowledge of
Codes of Safety Working practices as published – Knowledge of type of information issued by D.G.
Shipping with regard to safety at sea & safe working practices.
UNIT III SURVIVAL TECHNIQUES AND LIFE SAVING APPLIANCES ON SHIP 9
Introduction and safety – Emergency situations – Principles of survival – Use of survival equipment –
Survival craft and rescue boat – Methods of helicopter rescue – Launching arrangements – Lifeboat
engine and accessories – Evacuation – Signalling equipment and pyrotechnics – First aid – Radio
equipment – Launching and handling survival craft in rough weather – Understand practical
applications of medical guides – Understand process of radio medical advice – Demonstrate
knowledge of actions to be taken in case of accidents or illnesses that are likely to occur on board
ships.
UNIT IV RULES & REGULATIONS 9
IMO & its conventions – Indian Merchant Shipping Act & Rules – Classification society – Charterers –
Personal relationship onboard ship.
Knowledge of the appropriate statutes of concern to marine engineer officers: The administrative
duties of a Chief Engineer – the organisation and training of staff for both normal and emergency
duties. The various statutory certificates and documents to be carried onboard ships by all ships:
Dangerous goods codes– Carrying more than 2000 tonnes of oil – Chemical tankers and Gas
carriers.
UNIT V PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 9

Principles of controlling subordinates and maintaining good relationship – staff attitudes – Exercise of
authority – Group behaviour – Conditions of employment.
Organisation of Staff: Manning arrangements – Analysis of work – Allocation of staff – Organisation
of safety and emergencies, staff duties, maintenances, Ship’s records, communication on the ship,
meeting techniques.
Training on board ships: Training methods – Training in safety – Emergency drills – Training in ship
operations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the Course the students will be able to:
• Take precautions required for oil tanker operations.
• Follow MARPOL 73/78 requirements and Safe Working Practices.
• Handle Life Saving and Survival at Sea techniques.
• Adhere to IMO and its conventions and statutory certificates of ships.
• Carry out understand Personnel Management, Training and Emergency drills of ships
TEXT BOOK:
1. STCW – 1995 Hand Book
REFERENCES
1. Bhandarkar V.K. “MS & M Notices”, 1st Edition, Bhandarkar Publishers, Mumbai,
1998.
2. International Maritime Organisation, “SOLAS consolidated Edition 1997”, 2nd Edition,
Sterling Book House, Mumbai, 1997.
3. International Maritime Organisation, “MARPOL 73/78 consolidated edition 1997”, 2nd
Edition, Sterling Book House, Mumbai, 1997.
4. R. H. B. Sturt, “The Collision Regulations”, 2nd Edition, Lloyd’s of London Press Ltd.,
London, 1984.
CO PO PSO
1 1 0 0 1 1 3 2 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 2 1
2 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 0
3 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1
4 1 0 0 1 1 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 2 0
5 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 1 0 0 0 2 2 1 0
Avg 1 0 0 0.4 0.4 1.4 2.6 0 1 0 0 0 2 1.2 1.4 0.4
.
MV3007 ADVANCED MARINE HEAT ENGINES LTP C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge to the students in.
• Complex heat engine plants
• Combustion and flame stabilization
• Turbo blowers and turbo compressors
• Heat exchanger
• Recent trends in Marine Machinery
UNIT I COMPLEX HEAT ENGINE PLANTS 9

Combined Steam Turbine and Diesel Engine Cycles. Combined steam Turbine and Gas Turbine
cycles. Combined Gas Turbine and Diesel Engine cycles/Plants. Methods of improving the overall
thermal efficiency of the entire plant. Cascade Refrigeration plants. Free piston Gas Generators.
UNIT II COMBUSTION AND FLAME STABILISATION 9

Combustion of liquid fuels, atomization, mixing, combustion curve and different methods of flame
stabilization, design and combustion chamber. Spray of fuel. Pre-mixing of gaseous fuels for
combustion. Stability of the flame. introduction of simulation of engine.
UNIT III TURBO BLOWERS AND TURBO COMPRESSORS 9

Compressor characteristics for axial flow compressors and centrifugal compressors. Stalling of
compressors. Turbine characteristics. Matching of components like compressor and turbine.
Performance of different units in combination in single shaft arrangement. Variable Geometry turbo
charges.
UNIT IV HEAT EXCHANGER 9
Types – construction – design – applications.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Diesel Engines using LNG vapour, cam less intelligent Engines, CRDI, NOx and SOx control by
various types – Exhaust gas recirculation –water injection selective cat
Reduction – Emission variable injection timing.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the Complex of heat engine plants
CO2: Identify the troubles of Combustion and flame stabilization
CO3: Understand the characteristics and performance of Turbo blowers and turbo compressors
CO4: Maintain and repair Heat exchanger
CO5: Understand the recent trends in Marine Machinery
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reed”s Marine Engineering Series, “Heat and Heat Engines”, Thomas ReedPublications Ltd.,
1983
2. Gorla, “ Turbomachinery”’ 1st Ed. Taylor & Francis, First Indian reprint 2011(Yesdee Publishing)
3. William Embleton, Leslie Jackson, “Applied Heat For Marine Engineers”, 4th Ed. Vol 3, Reeds
London, 2011
4. KuppanThulukkanam, “Heat Exchanger Design Handbook”, 1st Ed., CRC Press, 2000
REFERENCES
1. Turton,“Principles of Turbomachinery”,2nd Ed. Springer, Reprint 2010,(Yesdee Publishing)
2. Eric, M. Smith, “Advances in Thermal Design of Heat Exchangers”, 1st Ed. Wiley Publishing, 2005
3. Ramesh K. Shah, Dušan P. Sekulić , “ Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design”, 1st Ed. John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.,2003

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Av 5/5 2/2 4/4 4/4 2/2 1/1 1/1= 2/2= 1/1= 1/1= 5/5= 5/5=
g =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3008 MARINE ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge to the students on.
• Basic concepts and first law of thermodynamics
• Basic concepts of second law of thermodynamics
• Fluid cycles
• Gas power cycles
• Thermodynamic relations and combustion of fuel
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9

Thermodynamic systems, concepts of continuum, thermodynamic properties, equilibrium, processes,
cycle, work, heat, temperature, Zeroth law of thermodynamics. First law of thermodynamics –
applications to closed and open systems, internal energy, specific heats, enthalpy, – applications to
steady and unsteady flow conditions.
UNIT II BASIC CONCEPTS OF SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9
Thermodynamic systems, second law of thermodynamics Statements, Reversibility, causes of
irreversibility, Carnot cycle, reversed Carnot cycle, heat engines, refrigerators, and heat pumps.
Clausius inequality, entropy, principles of increase in entropy, Carnot theorem, available energy,
availability.
UNIT III FLUID CYCLES 9
Thermo dynamic properties of pure substances, property diagram, PVT surface of water and other
substances, calculation of properties, first law and second law analysis using tables and charts,
UNIT IV GAS POWER CYCLES 9
Properties of ideal and real gases, equation of state, gas laws. Gas power cycles – Carnot, Otto,
Diesel, Dual, Brayton, Ericsson, Sterling, Lenoir, Atkinson Cycles.
UNIT V THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS AND COMBUSTION OF FUEL 9
Exact differentials, T-D diagrams, Maxwell relations, Clasius Claperon Equations, Joule Thomson
coefficients. Heat value of fuels, Combustion equations, Theoretical and excess air, Air fuel ratio and
Exhaust gas analysis
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Knowledge on the basic concepts and first law of thermodynamics
CO2: Understand the concepts of second law of thermodynamics
CO3: Calculate the properties of substances.
CO4: Calculate the Properties of ideal and real gases Gas power cycles
CO5: knowledge on fuel used in IC Engines and Combustion of Fuels
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag, P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited New Delhi, 1993.
2. Russel, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Holmann, “Thermodynamics”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company,New York,1888.
2. Rao, Y.V.C., “Thermodynamics”,4th Edition,Wiley Eastern Ltd.,New Delhi,1993.
3. Wlliam Embletonobe., “Applied Heat for Engineers”, Reed’s Marine Engineering Series, Vol.3,
Thomas Reed Publication, Reprint 1999.
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 3/3= 2/2= 5/5= 1/1= 4/4= 3/3= 5/5= 2/2= 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3009 MECHANICS OF MARINE MACHINES LT P C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Mechanisms
• Theory of gearing
• Control mechanisms
• Balancing
• Vibration
UNIT I MECHANISMS 9
Introduction – science of mechanisms – terms and definitions kinematic inversion – slider crank
chain inversions – four bar chain inversions – Grashoff’s law–Determination of velocities and
acceleration in mechanisms – relative motion method (graphical) for mechanisms having turning,
sliding and rolling pair – Coriolis acceleration
Force Analysis Of Mechanisms : Static, Inertia and combined force analysis – graphical and
analytical method – slider crank mechanism and four bar mechanism, turning moment diagram and
flywheel – applications in engine, punching presses.
UNIT II THEORY OF GEARING 9
Classification of gears, law of gearing, nomenclature – involutes as a gear tooth profile –lay out of an
involute gear, producing gear tooth – interference and undercutting – minimum number of teeth to
avoid interference, contact ratio, internal gears – cycloid tooth profiles – comparison of involutes and
cycloidal tooth forms, Backlash of Marine Gearing. Self-Shift Synchronous Gears.
UNIT III CONTROL MECHANISMS 9
Governors – gravity controlled and spring controlled – governor characteristics – governor effort and
power - Gyroscopes – gyroscopic forces and couple – forces on bearing due to gyroscopic action –
gyroscopic effects on the movement of air planes and ships, stability of two wheel drive and four
wheel drive
UNIT IV BALANCING 9
Static and dynamic balancing – balancing of rotating masses – balancing of several masses in
different planes – balancing of rotors, balancing machine, unbalance due to reciprocating parts –
Balancing of inline engines – firing order – balancing of V and W engines – balancing of radial
engines – Lanchester technique of engine balancing.
UNIT V VIBRATION 9
Periodic motion – non harmonic periodic motion – undamped free vibration – linear and torsion
solution – natural frequency of single degree freedom system –– Free vibrations with viscous
damping of single degree freedom system and solution – logarithmic decrement.
Forced vibration of single degree freedom system with damping – reciprocating and rotating
unbalance – vibration isolation and transmissibility System with two degrees of freedom – shaft with
two rotors, system with many degrees of freedom –three rotor system – geared system- torsional
vibration of major components in Ships - problems.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analysis the various forces
CO2: Classify the gears and identify various parameters of gears and gear trains
CO3: Evaluate Governors and gyroscopic forces & couple
CO4: Explain the Concept of Static and dynamic balancing
CO5: Problem analysis due to vibration.
TEXT BOOK
1. Rattan S.S, ‘’Theory of Machines’’, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi,
1998.
2. Rao, J.S., and Dukkipatti, R.V., “Mechanism and machinery theory”, 2nd Edition, New age
international, Mumbai, 1992.
3. Srikant Bhave, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 1st Ed. Pearson, 2010
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3010 MARINE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Metal joining processes
• Casting processes
• Surface finishing processes
• Metal forming processes
• Machining processes
UNIT I METAL JOINING PROCESSES 9

Metal joining processes – flexible and permanent, Principles of welding – Fundamentals of arc
welding, gas welding, gas cutting and Under water welding, Brazing and Soldering. Classification
plastic welding, fusion welding, solid phase welding and sub classification. Study of power sources,
electrodes, processes and applications: SMAW, SAWM, GTAW, GMAW, PAW, electro gas welding
and Electro Slag, resistance welding. Defects and Inspection of welded joints.
UNIT II CASTING PROCESSES 9

Sand casting, pattern and core making, moulding process - sand properties, melting furnaces – pit
furnace and electric furnaces. Special casting processes – shell, investment, die casting – pressure
and gravity types – squeeze casting - defects in casting - Plastic moulding – injection and blow
moulding, and moulding – testing and inspection., Defects in shafting
UNIT III SURFACE FINISHING PROCESSES 9

Surface finishing processes: grinding processes, various types of grinders, work holding devices,
grinding wheels and specification, selection of grinding wheels for specific applications – selection of
cutting speed and work speed. Fine Finishing Process: Lapping, honing, and super finishing process ,
ship hull finishing.
UNIT IV METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9

Hot and cold working processes – rolling, forging, drawing and extrusion processes, bending, hot
spinning, shearing, tube and wire drawing, cold forming, shot peening. Sheet metal working –
blanking, piercing, punching, trimming, bending – types of dies – progressive, compound and
combination dies. High-energy rate forming processes.
UNIT V MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Lathe: working principle, classification, specification accessories, lathe and tool holders, different
operations on a lathe, methods of taper turning machining time and power required for cutting, Drilling
and boring - classification, specification, cutters speed feed, machining time parts and description of
parts parts-boring machines- jig borer –description, types and hole location procedures – milling -
classification, principle, parts- specification milling cutters indexing, selection of milling /c fundament
also finches processes, milling processes and operations – CNC machines.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Carry out Metal joining processes
• Understand Casting processes
• Evaluate Surface finishing processes
• Design Metal forming processes
• Classify Machining processes
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jeffus, Welding and Metal fabrication”,1st Ed. Cengage, Indian reprint-Yesdee Publishings Pvt.
Ltd. 2012
2. Rao.P.N., “Manufacturing Technology, Metal Cutting and Machine Tools”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2000.
3. Shan, H.S., “ Manufacturing processes”, Vol I, 1st Ed. Pearson, 2013
REFERENCES
1. Jain K.C. Agarwal, L.N. “Metal Cutting Science and Production Technology”,1st edition,
Khanna Publishers, 1986.
2. Chapman W.A.J., “Workshop Technology”, Vol. II, Arnold Publishers,1972
3. H.M.T., “Production Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2000.
4. SeropeKalpakjian , Steven,R. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,” 4th Ed.
Pearson, 2011
5. Timings, “Fabrication and Welding Engineering’, Elsevier, Indian Reprint –Yesdee Publishings
Pvt. Ltd. 2011
6. Kemp & Young, “Ship construction: Sketches and Notes”, 1st Ed. Standfor Maritime Limited,
1982

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3011 MARINE ENGINEERING MATERIALS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To Impart Knowledge to the Students on
• Fundamentals of metallurgy
• Heat treatment
• Mechanical properties and testing
• Material processing
• Testing of joints
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF METALLURGY 9

Basic metallurgy, metals and processes, properties of materials and uses - Metallurgy of steel and
cast iron - iron – Iron carbide equilibrium diagram. Classification of steel and cast Iron, microstructure
- Aluminum, copper and its alloys - Non-metallic materials – polymers properties - applications of
marine materials.
UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 9

Definition – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallization and spheroidizing – normalizing, hardening
and tempering of steel. Isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on I.T.
diagram - Hardenability, Jominy end quench test –Austempering, martempering – case hardening –
carbu rising, nitriding, cyaniding, carbonitriding, flame and induction hardening – precipitation
hardening.
UNIT III MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTING 9

Mechanism of plastic deformation, slip and twinning – Types of fracture – Failure modes - Testing of
materials under tension, compression and shear loads – Hardness tests (Brinell, Vickers and
Rockwell), Impact test - Izod and Charpy, Fatigue and creep tests, fracture toughness tests.
UNIT IV MATERIAL PROCESSING 9

Properties and applications of materials used in machinery on board ships. Engineering processes
used in construction and repair. Design characteristics and selection of materials in construction of
equipment – Welding, Gas cutting methods.
UNIT V TESTING OF JOINTS 9

Materials under load, self-secured joints, permanent joints, bonding plastics, adhesives and
bonding. Vibration tests. Destructive and non-destructive testing of materials – different methods
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Distinguish the Properties of metals & non-metals and uses
CO2: Demonstrate the various heat treatment processes
CO3: Demonstrate Metal Processing methods
CO4: Conduct destructive and non-destructive tests on materials.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski “Engineering Materials” Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited, 4th Indian Reprint 2002.
2. Frederick, S.H. Capper,H. ,”Materials for Marine Machinery”Marine Media Management, 1st
Edition, 1976
3. Jindal,U.C., Atish Mozumder, “Material Science and Metallurgy”, 1st Ed. Pearson, Third
Impression 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Eyres, D.J. “Ship Construction” 5Edition,2001 (Elsevier India Private limited, Reprint 2005)
2. William D Callister “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons 2007.
3. Raghavan.V “Materials Science and Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd.,
2007.
4. Parasihivamurthy, K.I., “Material Science and Metallurgy”, 1st Ed. Pearson, 2012.
5. Higgins, “Materials for Engineers and Technicians”4th Ed. Elsevier, Reprint 2009
(YesdeePublishings Pvt. Ltd.)
6. Sir Alan Cottrell, “ An Introduction to Metallurgy”, 2nd Ed. Universities Press, Indian Reprint
2013
7. Todd. B, “Selecting Material for Sea Water Systems”, Marine Engineering Practice , Vol-1,
Part-10, IMarEST, London, Reprint 1996

CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO PSO
PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3012 MARINE CORROSION AND PREVENTION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge to the students on
• Sacrificial and Cathodic protection
• Hull plate preparation
• Modern paint types
• Corrosion in boiler
• Corrosion and its prevention
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Cathodic Protection – Sacrificial anodes protection – Impressed current system protection – Bimetallic
corrosion – Design faults causing corrosion – corrosion of metals in sea water, metallic corrosion.
UNIT II HULL PLATE PREPARATION 9

Plate preparation during building and repair periods -Atmospheric Corrosion Mill scale – flame
cleaning – Acid Pickling – Blast cleaning – causes of paint failure – shipboard preparations for
painting – power wire brushing – power discing – air hammer – high pressure water blasting – sand
blasting shot blasting
UNIT III MODERN PAINT TYPES 9
Basic composition of paint Albyd – bitumen or pitch – chlorinated rubber – coaltar epoxy – Epoxy –
oleoresinous – phenolic – polyurethane – primers – vinyl – self polrshing copolymers – shipboard
paint systems – underwater AF paints – boot top anti corrosive paints – super structure paints.
UNIT IV CORROSION IN BOILER 9
Atoms & Ions, Ph value electrochemical corrosion, Direct chemical attack – Electro chemical attack –
reason – remedial measures. Effect of salts & Grease in feed water. Effect of corrosion while boiler
not in service – preservation to avoid corrosion. CORROSION IN MARINE DIESEL ENGINES:
Corrosive wear of cylinder liners – Reasons and remedies – corrosion of Main Engine Jacket cooling
spaces – Reasons and remedies – corrosion in bearings.
UNIT V CORROSION AND ITS PREVENTION 9
Mechanism of corrosion – Chemical corrosion – Electro chemical corrosion – Anomic & cathodic
protection – forms of metallic coatings – anodizing – phosphating.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Identify the Causes of Hull corrosion
CO2: Apply correct Method of prevention during operation.
CO3: Select Anti-corrosive paints
CO4: Detect Corrosion in BOILERS and IC ENGINES
CO5: Design and develop mechanism of corrosion.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lavery, H.I.,”Shipboard operations” Institute of Marine Engineers Publication, 1990
2. Schweitzer, ‘Fundamentals of Corrosion”,1st Ed. Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint 2012
(Yesdee Publishing Pvt. Ltd.)
3. M.E.P., “Corrosion for Marine & Offshore Engineers”, Marine Engineering Practice, Vol.02,
Part 11, IMarEST, London
4. Francis Laurence LaQue , “ Marine corrosion: causes and prevention”, 1st Ed., Wiley, 1975
5. Claire Hellio, Diego M. Yebra, Pinturas Hempel S.A., “Advances in Marine Antifouling
Coatings and Technologies”, Woodhead Publishing, 2009
REFERENCES
1. Pierre R. Roberge, “Corrosion Engineering Principles and Practice”, 1st Ed., McGraw Hill,
2008
2. Zaki Ahmad, “Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control”,1st Ed. Elsevier
Ltd.,2006
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO4
10 11 12 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Av 5/5= 3/3= 2/2= 5/5= 1/1= 4/4= 3/3= 5/5= 2/2= 5/5 3/3= 4/4=1 3/3= 5/5= 5/5=1
g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 =1 1 1 1
MV3013 MARINE MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Sliding and Rolling Contact bearings
• Spur, Helical Bevel and Worm Gears
• IC Engine Parts
• Valves &Lifting Devices
• Design criteria for Marine systems
UNIT I SLIDING AND ROLLING CONTACT BEARINGS 9

Journal bearings, thrust bearings, friction in journal bearings, bearing loads, bearing design using
various equations. Thermal Equilibrium. Rolling bearing -Load ratings, types of radial ball bearings,
selection of bearings, lubrication of ball and roller bearings, methods of failure.
UNIT II SPUR, HELICAL BEVEL AND WORM GEARS 9

Basic design principles of spur gears, helical gears, dynamic tooth loads, design for strength and
wear. Lewis and Buckingham equations. Basic design principles of bevel gears and worm gears,
Lewis formula, thermal rating of worm gears.
UNIT III IC ENGINE PARTS 9

Piston, connecting rod with bearings, crankshaft, flywheel and rocker arms
UNIT IV VALVES & LIFTING DEVICES 9

Valves, safety valves and reducing valves - crane hooks, lifting chains, chain blocks, E.O.T. Crane.
UNIT V DESIGN CRITERIA FOR MARINE SYSTEMS 9

Water cooling systems for diesel engines and steam plants. Lubricating oil systems for propulsion
and auxiliary engines. Electro hydraulic steering gear system including rudder, rudderstock, tiller,
rams. Marine Diesel Engine air starting system including air receiver, compressors and air starting
valves. Marine Diesel Engine Scavenge and Exhaust systems. Marine diesel Engine fuel injection
system including fuel pumps and fuel injectors. Power transmission system including thrust blocks,
intermediate shaft and tail end shaft. Steam turbine plants. Gas turbine plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Identify suitable types of Bearings.
CO2: Design of IC Engine parts and gears.
CO3: Design of Marine Machinery systems.
CO4: Conduct tests on valves
CO5: Understand the design criteria for marine systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jindal, U.C., “Machine Design”,1st.Ed., Pearson, 2010
2. Leslie Jackson, “Instrumentation and Control Systems”, 3rd Edition, Thomas Reed Publication
Ltd., London, 1992.
3. Krishna Rao, T., “Design of Machine Elements’, 1st Ed., Vol.2., I K International Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd., 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Indian Register of Shipping Part 1 to Part 7, “Rules and Regulations & Classification of steel
ships” 1st Edition, Mumbai, 1999.
2. Sam Had Dad, Neil Watson, “Design and Application in Diesel Engines”, 1st Edition, Ellis
Horwood Limited, London, 1984.
3. Pandya & Shah, “Machine Design”, 13th Edition, Charotar Publishing House, Gujarath, 1997.
4. D.A. Taylor, “Marine Control Practice”, 2nd Edition, Butter worth & Co (Publishers) Ltd.,
London, 1987 5. ASME Standard Technology , “ A Guide to American Crane Standards”,
ASME, 2008
5. Smith.S.G,“Application Of Automatic Machinery And Alarm Equipment In Ships”, Marine
Engineering Practice, Vol 1, Part 06, IMarEST, London, 2002
6. Pearson, G.H., “Valve Design”, 1st Ed., Mechanical Engineering Publications”, 1978

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3 4
1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 2 1 1 1 1
4 2 1 1 1 1
5 2 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 1/1= 2/2= 4/4=
10/5=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 1/1=1
1 1 1 1
MV3014 SPECIAL DUTY VESSELS AND TYPE OF OPERATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Operation of Bulk Carriers
• Oil Tanker Cargo Operations
• Oil Tankers Routine Operations
• Intrinsically Dangerous Cargos
• Rules and Regulations
Need for special duty vessels with reference to development of trade and necessities of the trade.
Operation of Bulk carriers – Bulk Grain and ore etc., - Banana carriers – Coal Carriers – Forest
Products carriers – Timber carriers – Container vessels.
UNIT II OIL TANKER CARGO OPERATIONS 9

Pipeline systems – Ring main – Direct Line – Combined – Free flow system – Stripping lines. Lining
up pipe lines and cargo operations – loading more than one grade – discharging – ballasting –
precautions – ship / shore checks list safety goods – sources of ignition on – static electricity –
precautions to prevent ignition due to static electricity cargo operations when not secured alongside –
procedure if oil spill occurs – oil record books.
UNIT III OIL TANKERS ROUTINE OPERATIONS 9

Inert Gas system – principle – components of system, plant and distribution system – uses of inert
gas during tanker operating cycle. Tank washing: Procedure – portable and fixed machines – tank
washing with water –washing atmospheres – crude oil washing (COW) – advantages and
disadvantages of COW – operating and safety procedures – gas freeing – pressure vacuum values –
“Load on Top” system (LOT) regulations and operation – Segregated Ballast Tanks (SBT).
UNIT IV INTRINSICALLY DANGEROUS CARGOS 9

Dangerous goods – loaded in bulk – packaging – IMDG code – emergency procedures – ‘MS & M’
notices – general fire precautions, during loading / discharging, - firefighting and detection system.
Liquefied gas cargoes – regulations types of cargo and carriers – LPG and LNG – cargo handling
equipment’s tank monitors and controls – operational procedures loading and discharging of
LPG/LNG cargoes – chemical cargoes regulations, operations – bulk chemical carriers – tank material
and coatings – tank washing – cargo record book – equipment items precautions to be observed
during cargo operations in port – fire protection – personnel protection.
UNIT V RULES AND REGULATIONS 9

Classification societies for hull, equipment and machineries of Cargo ships and oil tankers –
requirements of various types of surveys and certification of Merchant Ships.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Create the need for special duty vessels
CO2: Familiarized with Operation of Bulk Carriers
CO3: Familiarized with Oil Chemical tankers, LPG / LNG vessels Cargo Operations
CO4: Conduct Oil Tankers Routine maintenance
CO5: Classify Intrinsically Dangerous Cargos
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lavery, “Ship board operation”, 2nd Edition, Butter Worth- Heinemann, London, 1990.
2. V.K. Bhandarkar, “MS & M Notices to Mariners”, 1st Edition, Bhandarkar Publications,
Mumbai, 1998.
3. D.J. Eyres, “Ship Construction”, 4th Edition, Butter worth – Heinemann, Oxford, 1994.
REFERENCES
1. Indian Register of Shipping Part1 to Part7,” Rules and Regulations for the construction and
classification of steel ships”, 1st Edition, Indian Register of Shipping, Mumbai, 1999.
2. International of Maritime Organization, “SOLAS consolidated Edition 1997”, 2nd Edition,
Sterling Book House, Mumbai, 1997.

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5
=1
MV3015 MARINE VEHICLES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Marine vehicle
• Submersibles vehicle
• Remotely Operable vehicle (ROV)
• Autonomous underwater vehicle (AUV)
• Manned submersible vehicle
UNIT I MARINE VEHICLES 6
Types – general – by function – commercial marine vehicles- submersibles types – applications
UNIT II SUBMERSIBLES 9
Manned and unmanned submersibles – towed vehicles – gliders – crawler – Design and construction
UNIT III REMOTELY OPERABLE VEHICLE (ROV) 9

Remotely Operable Vehicles (ROV) – The ROV business – Design theory and standards – control
and simulation – design and stability – components of ROV - applications
UNIT IV AUTONOMOUS UNDERWATER VEHICLE (AUV) 9

AUV – Design and construction – components – sensors – Navigation -control strategies –
applications
UNIT V MANNED SUBMERSIBLE 12

Introduction – Design and operational consideration – pressure hulls and exostructures – ballasting
and trim – maneuvering and control – Life support and habitability – emergency devices and
equipment’s – certification and classification
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Distinguish the different types of marine vehicle
CO2: Familiarize with Submersibles vehicle
CO3: Understand the operation of Remotely Operable vehicle (ROV)
CO4: Understand the operation of Autonomous underwater vehicle (AUV)
CO5: Design operation of Manned submersible vehicle
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jonathan M. Ross, human factors for naval marine vehicle design and operation
2. Robert D. Christ,Robert L. Wernli, Sr. “The ROV Manual A User Guide for Remotely
3. Operated Vehicles”, Elsevier, second edition, 2014
4. Sabiha A. wadoo,pushkin kachroo, Autonomous underwater vehicles, modelling, control design
and Simulation, CRC press, 2011
5. R. Frank Busby, Manned Submersibles, Office of the oceanographer of the Navy, 1976
6. REFERENCES
7. Ferial L hawry, The ocean engineering handbook, CRC press,2000
8. Richard A Geyer, “Submersibles and their use in oceanography and ocean engineering”, Elsevier,
1997

CO PO PSO
PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO3 PSO4
1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2
4 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
5 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
Avg 8/5=1.6 3/3=1 9/3= 3/3=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 5/5=1 6/3=2 6/3=2 9/3=3 6/3=
3 2
MV3016 FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGIES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Performance characteristics of fuel cell power plant and its components.
• Performance and design characteristics and operating issues for various fuel cells.
• Design philosophy and challenges to make this power plant economically feasible.
• Design and analysis emphasis will be on the thermodynamics and electrochemistry.
• Working in a fuel cell industry R&D organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW OF FUEL CELLS TECHNOLOGY 9

Fuel cells: History – principle - working - thermodynamics and kinetics of fuel cell process –
performance evaluation of fuel cell – comparison on battery Vs fuel cell, Types of fuel cells – AFC,
PAFC, SOFC, MCFC, DMFC, PEMFC, microbial fuel cells, relative merits and demerits.
UNIT II FUEL CELL THERMODYNAMICS. 9

Gibbs free energy; reversible and irreversible loss - Nernst Equation; effect of temperature and
pressure concentration on Nernst potential – Concept of Electrode potential and Electrochemical
Potential.
UNIT III HYDROGEN FUEL AND FUEL CELL 9

Properties of hydrogen as fuel, Hydrogen pathways introduction-current uses, general introduction to
infrastructure requirement for hydrogen production, storage, dispensing and utilization, and hydrogen
production plants. low and high temperature fuel cells - Effect of Green House Gas (GHC) emission -
Basic fuel cell operations -Fuel cell and Hydrogen economy - Basic electrochemistry for all fuel cells
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF FUEL CELLS 9

Fuel cell usage for domestic power systems, large scale power generation, Automobile, Space,
economic and environmental analysis on usage of hydrogen and fuel cell. Future trends in fuel cells,
portable fuel cells, laptops, mobiles, submarines.
UNIT V HYDROGEN PRODUCTION AND STORAGE. 9

Thermal-Steam reformation, thermochemical water splitting, gasification-pyrolysis, nuclear thermal
catalytic and partial oxidation methods. Electrochemical-Electrolysis, photo electro chemical,
Biological-Anaerobic digestion, fermentation micro-organism, PM based electrolyser- Physical and
chemical properties, general storage methods, compressed storage-composite cylinders, glass micro
sphere storage, zeolites, metal hydride storage, chemical hydride storage and cryogenic storage,
carbon based materials for hydrogen storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Apply know-how of thermodynamics, electrochemistry, heat transfer, and fluid mechanics
principles to design and analysis of this emerging technology.
CO2: Have thorough understanding of performance behavior, operational issues and challenges for
all major types of fuel cells.
CO3: Identify, formulate, and solve problems related to fuel cell technology keeping in mind economic
viability.
CO4: Use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for design and analysis of
innovative fuel cell systems.
CO5: Understand the impact of this technology in a global and societal context.
CO6: Develop enough skills to design systems or components of fuel cells.
CO7: Be ready to begin a career as an engineer in companies developing fuel cell components and
systems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Fuel Cell Systems Explained by James Larminie and Andrew Dicks, Second Edition, John Wiley,
New York, 2003, ISBN 0-470- 84857-X.
2. A.J. Appleby and F.R. Foulkes, Fuel Cell Handbook, Von Norstrand Reinhold, New York, 1989.
3. 2. A.J. Bard, and L.R. Faulkner, Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd
ed., Wiley, New York, 2001.
4. 3. L.J. Blomen, Fuel Cell Systems, Plenum Publishing Corporation, New York, NY, 1994.
REFERENCES :
1. A. Bauen and D. Hart, Assessment of the environmental benefits of transport and stationary fuel
cells, Journal of Power Sources, Vol. 86, pp. 482-494, 2000.
2. M. Cassir and C. Belhomme, Technological applications of molten salts: the case of the molten
carbonate fuel cell, Plasma & Ions, Vol. 1, pp. 3-15, 1999.
3. S. Gottesfeld, Polymer electrolyte fuel cells, Advances in Electrochemical Science and
Engineering, Vol. 5, Eds. R. C. Alkire, et al., Wiley-VCH, pp. 195-301, 1997.
4. Hammou, Solid oxide fuel cells, Advances in Electrochemical Science and Engineering, Vol. 2,
Eds. H. Gerischer and C.W. Tobias, et al., Wiley-VCH, pp. 88-139, 1992.
5. K. Hemmes, G. Lindbergh, J. R. Selman, D. A. Shores, and I. Uchida, Carbonate Fuel Cell
Technology, PV 99-20, Honolulu, Hawaii, Fall 1999, Published by The Electrochemical Society,
Inc., 10 South Main Street, Pennington, NJ, 08534; Tel: 609-7371902; website:
www.electrochem.org

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3017 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on the following topics;
• Testing of power apparatus and insulation coordination
• Nature of Breakdown mechanism in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics.
• Measurement of over voltages.
• Generation of over voltages in laboratories.
UNIT I OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9

Causes of over voltages and its effects on power system – Lightning, switching surges and temporary
over voltages, Corona and its effects–Bewley lattice Diagram-Protection against over voltages.
UNIT II DIELECTRIC BREAKDOWN 9

Properties of Dielectric materials - Gaseous breakdown in uniform and non-uniform fields – Corona
discharges – Vacuum breakdown – Conduction and breakdown impure and commercial liquids,
Maintenance of oil Quality–Breakdown mechanisms in solid and composite Dielectrics-Applications of
insulating materials in electrical equipment’s.
UNIT III GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9

Generation of High D.C. Voltage: Rectifiers, voltage multipliers, vandigraff generator: generation of
high impulse voltage: single and multistage Marx circuits–generation of high AC voltages: cascaded
transformers, resonant trans former and tesla coil- generation of switching surges – generation of
impulse Currents-Triggering and control of impulse generators.
UNIT IV MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
High Resistance with series ammeter – Dividers, Resistance, Capacitance and Mixed dividers – Peak
Voltmeter, Generating Voltmeters - Capacitance Voltage Transformers, Electrostatic Voltmeters –
Sphere Gaps - High Current Shunts-Digital techniques in high voltage measurement.
UNIT V HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING & INSULATION COORDINATION 9

High voltage testing of electrical power apparatus as per International and Indian standards–Power
frequency, impulse voltage and DC testing of Insulators, circuit breakers, bushing, isolators and
transformers –Insulation Coordination & testing of capabilities.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Have thorough understanding of Transients in power system.
CO2: Identify, formulate, and solve problems related to Generation and measurement of high
voltage.
CO3: Explain High voltage testing.
CO4: Understand various types of over voltages in power system.
CO5: Measure over voltages.
TEXT BOOKS:
• S. Naidu and V.Kamaraju, ‘HighVoltage Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition,2013.
• E.KuffelandW.S. Zaengl, J. Kuffel, High voltage Engineering fundamentals, Newnes Second
Edition Elsevier, New Delhi, 2005.
• C.L. Wadhwa, ‘High voltage Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, ThirdEdition,
2010.
REFERENCES:
• L.L.Alston,‘High Voltage Technology, Oxford University Press, First Indian Edition, 2011.
• Mazen Abdel–Salam, Hussein Anis, Ahdab A-Morshedy, Roshday Radwan, High Voltage
Engineering – Theory &Practice, Second Edition Marcel Dekker, Inc.,2010.
• Subir Ray,’ An Introduction to High Voltage Engineering’ PHI Learning Private Limited,
NewDelhi, Second Edition,2013.
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 3/3= 2/2= 5/5= 1/1= 4/4= 3/3= 5/5= 2/2= 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3018 MARINE CONTROL ENGINEERING AND AUTOMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To provide knowledge to the students on
• Control system
• Graphical representation of signals
• Process control systems
• Transmission
• Application of controls on ships
UNIT I CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Introduction to control terms, Block diagrams for control systems, open loop and closed feedback
control, comparison of closed and open loop, feed forward control. Feed forward modification. ON-
OFF control, sequential control, Proportional plus integral plus derivative controls. Use of various
control modes, Mathematical Model: Developing Mathematical Models for Mechanical, Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Thermal, Electrical and Electro Mechanical Systems
UNIT II GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF SIGNALS 9

Inputs of step, Ramp, Sinusoid, Pulse and Impulse, Exponential Function etc Error Detector,
Controller output elements. Dynamics of a simple servomechanism for Angular Position Control:
Torque Proportional to error, Different responses of servomechanism.
UNIT III PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Automatic closed loop process. Control system Dynamic characteristics of processes. Dynamic
characteristics of controllers. Electronic Instrumentation for measurement and control analog
computing and simulation: Introduction, Basic concepts. Analog computers. Simulation. The use of
Digital computer in the simulation of control system. Hybrid computers.
UNIT IV TRANSMISSION 9
Pneumatic and electric transmission - suitability for marine use. Pneumatic and types of controllers
hydraulic, electric and electronic controllers for generation of control action Time function controllers.
Correcting Units- Diaphragm actuators, Valve positioners, piston actuators, and Electro pneumatic
transducers. Electro- hydraulic actuators and Electric actuator control valves.
UNIT V APPLICATION OF CONTROLS ON SHIPS 9

Marine Boiler - Automatic Combustion control, Air - Fuel ratio control, feed water control single, two
and three-element type, steam pressure control, fuel oil temperature control, Control in Main
Machinery units for temperature of lubricating oil, jacket cooling water, fuel valve cooling water, piston
cooling water and scavenge air, fuel oil viscosity control. Bridge control of main machinery,
Instruments for UMS classification.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Classify basics of Control systems.
CO2: Create Graphical representation of signals.
CO3: Choose Electrical, Electronics, Pneumatic and Hydraulic control systems.
CO4: Understand Pneumatic and electric transmission
CO5: Design control systems for on board ships.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.A. Taylor, “Marine Control Practice”, 2nd Edition, Butter worth & Co (Publishers) Ltd., London,
1987.
2. Leslie Jackson, “Instrumentation and Control Systems”, 3rd Edition, Thomas Reed Publication
Ltd., London, 1992.
3. Bolton, “Control Systems”, 1st Ed. Elsevier, Indian reprint 2011 (Yesdee Publishing)
REFERENCES:
1. L.F. Adams, “Engineering Instrumentation and Control”, 1st Edition, English Language Book
Society (ELBS), Hodder, Stoughton, Great Britain, 1984.
2. Peter Harriott, “Process Control”, 26th reprint, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2005
3. Bhattacharya, S.K.,”Control Sytem Engineering”,2nd Ed. ,Pearson, 2012
4. Sinclair, “Sensors and Transdusers”, 3rd Ed. Elsevier, Reprint 2011 (Yesdee Publishing)
5. Smith.S.G, “Application Of Automatic Machinery And Alarm Equipment In Ships”, Marine
Engineering Practice, Vol 1, Part 06, I Mar EST, London, 2002
CO PO PSO
PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO3 PSO4
1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MV3019 MARINE ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Operation Amplifier Theory
• Digital Circuits
• Converters (a-d and d- a)
• Industrial Electronics
• Microprocessors
UNIT I OPERATION AMPLIFIER THEORY 9

Concept of Differential Amplifiers – its use in DP AMPS, Linear OP amp circuits.
UNIT II DIGITAL CIRCUITS 11

Logic Systems and Gates – Binary and BCD codes – Boolean algebra – Simplifications – Flip – flops
– Counters – Registers and multiplexers. ITL & CMOS GATES: Digital integrated circuits –
Semiconductor memories – ROM – RAM and PROM.
UNIT III CONVERTERS; (A-D AND D- A): 10

Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog Converters and their use in Data – Loggers. ELECTRONIC
INSTRUMENTS Cathode Ray Oscilloscope – digital voltmeters and frequency meters – Mustimeters
– Vacuum Tube voltmeter and signal Generators – Q- Meters., Transducers for vibration, pressure,
volume, velocity measurement-V-I,I-V,P-I,I-P Converters.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS 8

Power rectification – silicon control rectifier power Control-Filters, RPS –Photoelectric devices –
invertors. Satellite communication as applicable to GMDSS, GPS, Inmarsat. Introduction to ECDIS
UNIT V MICROPROCESSORS 7
8085 Architecture – Programming – interfacing and Control of motors – Temperature/Speed control –
Basics and Control mechanism of PLC.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the concepts of Amplifier Theory, Digital Circuits, Logic systems and Gates.
CO2: Identify Analog and Digital Converters and their applications
CO3: Select Electronic Instruments and Micro Processors suitable for Marine operations.
CO4: Examine the Satellite communication as applicable to GMDSS, GPS, Inmarsat
CO5: Design the programming of microprocessors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramakant.A. Geakwad, “Linear integrated circuits”, 3rd edition, Prentice – Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2001
2. Malvino Leach, “Digital principles and applications”, 5th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, Publishing co.,
New Delhi, 1995.
3. Hofmann, “Global Positioning System”, 5th Ed.,Springer, Indian reprint 2007 (Yesdee Publishings
Pvt. ltd.)
REFERENCES:
1. P.S.Bimbhra, “Power Electronics”, 3rd edition, Khanna Publisher, New Delhi, 2001.
2. Ramesh Gaonkar, “Microprocessors and Microcomputers”, 4th edition, Ulhasthatak, India, 1999.
3. Ray choudhary & Shail B Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International publisher, 2015
4. Rashid, “Power Electronics Handbook”,3rd Ed. Elsevier, Indian Reprint 2013 ( Yesdee
CO PO PSO
PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Av 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
g
MV3020 MARINE ROBOTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Marine Robots
• Robotic Sailing
• Submersibles
• Autonomous Underwater Vehicle (auv)
• Underwater Vehicle Guidance and Control
UNIT I MARINE ROBOTS 9

Types and classification of marine robots – robotic sailing – submersibles, applications of sailing
robots and submersibles, Limitations in marine autonomy
UNIT II ROBOTIC SAILING 9

History and recent developments in robotic sailing – miniature sailing robot platform (MOOP) –
autonomous sailing vessel – design, development and deployment
UNIT III SUBMERSIBLES 9

Unmanned submersibles- towed vehicles – Remotely Operable Vehicles (ROV) – The ROV business
– Design theory and standards – control and simulation – design and stability – components of ROV -
applications
UNIT IV AUTONOMOUS UNDERWATER VEHICLE (AUV) 9

Gliders – construction – buoyancy driven – Control strategies, AUV – construction – components –
control strategies
UNIT V UNDERWATER VEHICLE GUIDANCE AND CONTROL 9

Modelling of marine vehicles – kinematics – rigid body dynamics – hydrodynamic forces and moments
– equation of motion – stability and control of underwater vehicles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Display the knowledge in various types of marine robots.
CO2: Understand the basic concepts of designing robots.
CO3: Develop and deploy marine robots in the field
CO4: Design AUV
CO5: Familiarized with stability and control of underwater vehicles
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alexander Schlaelfer and Ole Blaurock, “Robotic sailing”, Proceedings of the 4th International
sailing conference, Springer, 2011
2. 2 Sabiha A. Wadoo, Pushkin Kachroo, “Autonomous underwater vehicles, modelling, control
design and Simulation”, CRC press, 2011
3. 3 Robert D. Christ,Robert L. Wernli, Sr. “The ROV Manual a User Guide for Remotely Operated
Vehicles”, Elsevier, second edition, 2014
4. 4 Thor I Fossen, “Guidance and control of ocean vehicles”, John wiley and Sons, 1999
REFERENCES:
1. Mae L. Seto, “Marine Robot Autonomy”, Springer, 2013
2. Richard A Geyer, “Submersibles and their use in oceanography and ocean engineering”, Elsevier,
1997
3. Gianluca Antonelli, “Underwater robotics”, Springer, 2014

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3021 CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn about the principles of cyber-physical systems
• To familiarize with the basic requirements of CPS.
• To know about CPS models
• To facilitate the students to understand the CPS foundations
• To make the students explore the applications and platforms.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CYBER-PHYSICAL SYSTEMS 9

Cyber-Physical Systems(CPS)-Emergence of CPS, Key Features of Cyber-Physical Systems,,
CPS Drivers-Synchronous Model : Reactive Components, Properties of Components, Composing
Components, Designs- Asynchronous Model of CPS: Processes, Design Primitives, Coordination
Protocols
UNIT II CPS - REQUIREMENTS 9

Safety Specifications: Specifications, Verifying Invariants, Enumerative Search, Symbolic Search-
Liveness Requirements: Temporal Logic, Model Checking, Proving Liveness
UNIT III CPS MODELS 9

Dynamical Systems: Continuous, Linear Systems-Time Models, Linear Systems, Designing
Controllers, Analysis Techniques- Timed Model: Processes, Protocols, Automata- Hybrid
Dynamical Models
UNIT IV CPS FOUNDATIONS 9
Symbolic Synthesis for CPS- Security in CPS-Synchronization of CPS-Real-Time Scheduling for
CPS
UNIT V APPLICATIONS AND PLATFORMS 9

Medical CPS- CPS Built on Wireless Sensor Networks- CyberSim User Interface- iCleboKobuki -
iRobot Create- myRIO- Cybersim- Matlab toolboxes - Simulink
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the core principles behind CPS
CO2: Discuss the requirements of CPS.
CO3: Explain the various models of CPS.
CO4: Describe the foundations of CPS.
CO5: Use the various platforms to implement the CPS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Raj Rajkumar, Dionisio De Niz , and Mark Klein, Cyber-Physical Systems, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2016
2. Rajeev Alur, Principles of Cyber-Physical Systems, MIT Press, 2015.
3. Lee, Edward Ashford, and Sanjit Arunkumar Seshia. Introduction to embedded systems: A
cyber physical systems approach. 2nd Edition, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. André Platzer, Logical Analysis of Hybrid Systems: Proving Theorems for Complex Dynamics.,
Springer, 2010. 426 pages, ISBN 978-3-642-14508-7.
2. Jean J. Labrosse, Embedded Systems Building Blocks: Complete and Ready-To-Use Modules
in C, The publisher, Paul Temme, 2011.
3. Jensen, Jeff, Lee, Edward, A Seshia, Sanjit, An Introductory Lab in Embedded and Cyber-
Physical Systems, http://leeseshia.org/lab, 2014.

CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3022 AUTONOMOUS SHIPS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Remote Controlled Ship Operation
• Marine Situational Awareness and Autonomous Navigation
• Legal Implications of Remote and Autonomous Shipping
• Safety and Security in autonomous shipping
• Innovations to Markets, Redefining Shipping
Background-AAWA Initiative-Vision of remote controlled ship Operation-Voyage planning and
initiation Unmooring and maneuvering out of Harbor-Operation modes at open Sea-Port approach
and docking Applicability for different ship types
UNIT II TECHNOLOGIES FOR MARINE SITUATIONAL AWARENESS AND AUTONOMOUS
NAVIGATION 9
Autonomous navigation of the Vessel-Situational awareness (SA) for autonomous ships-Off-ship
communication
UNIT III LEGAL IMPLICATIONS OF REMOTE AND AUTONOMOUS SHIPPING 9

Introduction-Law at Sea-Technical Requirements-Liability Rules Summary.
UNIT IV SAFETY AND SECURITY IN AUTONOMOUS SHIPPING – CHALLENGES FOR

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Introducing of autonomous merchant ships for maritime Operation-Are ‘unmanned ships’ safe?
Preconditions of safety and Security-Focal areas of risk – some selected examples Managing
shipping safety and security in short and long Term-Building risk understanding for the future
Recommendations
UNIT V INNOVATIONS TO MARKETS – REDEFINING SHIPPING 9

Redefining shipping – a transition to autonomous Shipping-Autonomous shipping – an issue of
business relationships and Networks-Autonomous shipping – a renewed set of roles between the key
Factors-Transition drivers to autonomous Shipping-Transition roadmap
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the remote Controlled Ship Operation
CO2: Gain Situational Awareness and Autonomous Navigation
CO3: Familiarized with Legal Implications of Remote and Autonomous Shipping
CO4: Create Safety and Security for autonomous shipping
CO5: Design Innovations to Markets.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arthur, W.B. (2009) The Nature of Technology: What It Is and How It Evolves, New York: Free
Press.
2. Frenken, K. (2000) A complexity approach to innovation networks. The case of the aircraft
industry.
3. Research Policy, 29(2), 257–272.
4. Geels, F.W. (2002) Technological transitions as evolutionary reconfiguration processes: a multi-
level
5. perspective and a case-study. Research Policy, 31(8-9), 1257–1274.
6. F.W. Geels. (2005) Technological Transitions and System Innovations. Cheltenham, UK: Edward
Elgar.
REFERENCES:
1. Greve, H. R. (2009). Bigger and safer: the diffusion of competitive advantage. Strategic
Management
2. Journal, 30 (1): 1–23.
3. Hakansson, H. &Snehota, I. (Eds.). (1995). Developing relationships in business networks.
London:
4. Routledge.
5. Håkansson, H., Ford, D., Gadde, L.-G., Snehota, I., & Waluszewski, A. (2009). Business in
Networks.
6. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons.
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5=1 3/3=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 1/1=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 2/2=1 5/5=1 3/3=1 4/4=1 3/3=1 5/5=1 5/5=1
MV3023 UNDERWATER VEHICLES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Marine Resources
• Underwater Exploration
• Subsea Pipeline and Risers
• Introduction to Underwater Vehicles
• Underwater Navigation &Sensing Systems
UNIT I MARINE RESOURCES 9

Introduction, Challenges in deep sea, Seafloor characteristics, Physical properties of sea water.
Effects of density, salinity and temperature on sound speed, Ocean resources, classification,
potential uses of sea, Mineral and hydrocarbon resources
UNIT II UNDERWATER EXPLORATION 9

Exploration, development, Underwater Sound Channels, Underwater instruments for positioning,
signal transfer and mapping, production of hydrocarbons, deep sea mining – national developments
UNIT III SUBSEA PIPELINE AND RISERS 9

Introduction subsea pipeline, Pipeline Elements, Piping material selection, Pipeline survey and
mapping, Pipeline route; Pipeline Installation Methods. Riser – different types of risers
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO UNDERWATER VEHICLES 9

Introduction, unmanned marine vehicles – Applications, Unmanned surface vehicles, unmanned
underwater vehicles – Remotely Operated Vehicles (ROVs) and Autonomous Underwater Vehicles
(AUVs), Classification, Types of ROV services, Operations, Type of propulsions, Design theory –
Vehicle design and stability
UNIT V UNDERWATER NAVIGATION & SENSING SYSTEMS 9

Vehicle sensors; Function of sensors, Types of sensors, Sensor Categories Vehicle navigation
sensors, Flux gate compass, Tether turn counter, Pressure-sensitive depth gauge, Obstacle
avoidance sonar, Altimeter, Inclinometer, Vehicle lighting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. List the various challenges involved in the underwater exploration
2. Explain the importance of ocean resources
3. Make use of the national developments in underwater exploration of resources
4. Inspect the different pipeline methods and their installation with respect to subsea applications
5. Develop the various sensors and navigation systems used for underwater Application
TEXT BOOKS:
1. G.Neumann & WJ Pierson, Jr., Principles of Physical Oceanography, Prentice Hall,1st edn.,1966.
2. 10. E S Cassdy, Introduction to Energy Resources, Technology and Society, Elsevier, 1st edn.,
2000.
3. D S Cronon, Underwater Minerals, Academic Press, 1st edn., 1980.
4. Robert D. Christ and Robert L. Wernli, Sr. The ROV Manual - A User Guide for Remotely
Operated Vehicles, 2nd ed. Elsevier, 2014
REFERENCES:
1. Borges & Ginsburg, Ocean Year Book (Vol 1 – 4), The University of Chicago Press, 1983.
2. Ghosh &Mukhopadyay, Mineral Wealth of the Ocean, Oxford & IBH Pub. Co., 2nd, 1999.
CO PO PSO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Av 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
g
MV3024 OFFSHORE TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Offshore Structures
• Ocean Environments
• Loads and Responses
• Fixed Offshore Platform Design factors
• Floating Offshore Platform Design Factors
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF OFFSHORE STRUCTURES 9
Introduction- Definition of Offshore Structures – Selection of Deepwater Production Concepts –
Functions of Offshore Structures – Exploratory Drilling Structures – Production Structures – Storage
Structures – Export Systems - Offshore Structures Configurations – Bottom – Supported Structures -
Floating Offshore Structures – Floating Vs Fixed Offshore Structures – Bottom – Supported Fixed
Structures – Minimal Platforms – Jacket Structures – Gravity Base Structures – Jack – Ups – Subsea
Templates – Subsea Pipelines – Complaint Structures – Articulated Platforms – Complaint Tower –
Guyed Tower - Floating Structures – Floating Platform Types – Drilling Units – Production Units –
Drilling And Production Units – Platform Configurations.
UNIT II OCEAN ENVIRONMENTS 9
Introduction – Ocean Water Properties – Density, Viscosity d Salinity, Temperature – Linear Wave
Theory – Second – Order Stokes Wave Theory – Stream Function Theory – Wave Theory – Breaking
Waves – Internal Waves. Discussion of Selected Innovative Field Development Concept: Field
Development Concept – Discussion of Selected Innovative structures – Structures Selected for in –
Depth Discussion – Construction and Construction Schedules – Transportation and Installation – In –
Service Response and Utilization – Capital and Operating Expenditures – Post – Service Utilization –
Residual Value and Risk Factors.
UNIT III LOADS AND RESPONSES 9
Introduction – Gravity Loads – Hydrostatic Loads – Resistance Loads – Current Loads on Structures
– Current Drag and Lift Force – Blockage Factor in Current – Steady and Dynamic Wind Loads on
Structures – Wave Loads on Structures – Morison Equation.
UNIT IV FIXED OFFSHORE PLATFORM DESIGN FACTORS 9
Field Development and Concept Selection Activities – Introduction – Design Spiral and Field
Development Timeline – Factors That Drive Concept Selection – Field Development Design Phase –
Basic and Detailed Design of a Fixed jacket – Tower – type Offshore Platform – Introduction –
Selection of The Design Parameters.
UNIT V FLOATING OFFSHORE PLATFORM DESIGN FACTORS 9

Introduction – Floating Platform Types – Functional Requirements – Stability – Floating Production
Storage and Offloading Systems – FPSO Hull Design Factors – Deck Structures – Turret Design
Factor and Selection – Semi – submersibles - Semi – submersibles Design Factors – Sizing of Semi –
submersibles – Weight and Buoyancy Estimates – Tension Leg Platforms – Introduction – Sizing of
TLP – Weight Estimates of TLPS – Spar – History of Spars – Spar Riser Systems – Spar Mooring –
Spar Sizing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: Definition of Offshore Structures.
CO2: Understand Ocean Environments
CO3: Classify the Loads applied on Offshore structures.
CO4: Apply Design factors for Fixed Offshore Platform
CO5: Functional requirements for Floating Offshore Platform.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Handbook of Offshore Engineering – 1, Elsevier publication, Edition 2006 by Subrata K.
Chakrabarti.
2. D Faulkner; M J Cowling; P A Frieze, “Integrity of offshore structures”, Publisher, Englewood,N.J.
Applied Science, 1981
3. American Petroleum Institute, “Recommended practice for planning, designing, and constructing
fixed offshore platforms: load and resistance factor design ; API recommended practice 2A-
LRFD (RP 2A-LRFD)” Publisher, American Petroleum Institute , Washington, DC: 1993
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Av 5/5 3/3 2/2 5/5 1/1 4/4 3/3 5/5 2/2 5/5= 3/3= 4/4= 3/3= 5/5= 5/5
g =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1 1 =1
GE3751 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Sketch the Evolution of Management.
• Extract the functions and principles of management.
• Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
• Study the various HR related activities.
• Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers-
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning and
management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership –
Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective communication
– Communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control and
performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th
Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Kreitner and MamataMohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 1
2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 1 - 2 - - 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 2
4 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 1 1
5 1 - - 1 1 - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1
AVg. 1.66 1 1 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1.5 1 1.25
GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus, TQM
framework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
• Explain the TQM Principles for application.
• Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
• Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply Techniques like
QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
• Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product and
service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief introduction) --
TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment,
Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal-- Continuous process
improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability- Bench
marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark, Understanding
Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using the findings, Pitfalls
and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages: Design FMEA and Process
FMEA.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards -
AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation- Internal
Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO 14000 Series
Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Bester field,MaryB.Sacre, HemantUrdhwareshe
and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.
REFERENCES:
1 Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2 Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3 Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition,2003.
4 Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd.,2006 .
GE3753 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding the concept of Engineering Economics.
• Implement various micro economics concept in real life.
• Gaining knowledge in the field of macro economics to enable the students to have better
• Understanding of various components of macro economics.
• Understanding the different procedures of pricing.
• Learn the various cost related concepts in micro economics.
UNIT I DEMAND & SUPPLY ANALYSIS 9

Managerial Economics - Relationship with other disciplines - Firms: Types, objectives and goals -
Managerial decisions - Decision analysis.Demand - Types of demand - Determinants of demand -
Demand function – Demand elasticity - Demand forecasting - Supply - Determinants of supply -
Supply function -Supply elasticity.
UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9

Production function - Returns to scale - Production optimization - Least cost input -
Isoquants - Managerial uses of production function. Cost Concepts - Cost function - Determinants of
cost - Short run and Long run cost curves - Cost Output Decision - Estimation of Cost.
UNIT III PRICING 9

Determinants of Price - Pricing under different objectives and different market structures
- Price discrimination - Pricing methods in practice.
UNIT IV FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - Financial Ratio
Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis – Comparative financial statements - Analysis &
Interpretation of financial statements.
UNIT V CAPITAL BUDGETING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Investments - Risks and return evaluation of investment decision - Average rate of return
- Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Students able to
CO1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will acquire the skills to apply the
basics of economics and cost analysis to engineering and take economically sound
decisions
CO2: Evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies
CO3: Understand the market structures and integration concepts
CO4: Understand the measures of national income, the functions of banks and concepts of
globalization
CO5: Apply the concepts of financial management for project appraisal
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,2001.
2. Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases - P. L. Mehta, Edition, 13. Publisher, Sultan
Chand, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg. Press, Texas,
2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New York,
2011.
4. Zahid A khan: Engineering Economy, "Engineering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
5. Dr. S. N. Maheswari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari: Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2009

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 3
2 3 2 2
3 2
4 2 3 3 2 2 3
5 3 3 3 2 2 2
AVg. 2.5 2.4 3 2 2 1.8 2.6 2
GE3754 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing,
• To provide knowledge about management issues related to training,
• To provide knowledge about management issues related to performance
• To provide knowledge about management issues related to compensation
• To provide knowledge about management issues related to human factors
consideration and compliance with human resource requirements.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9

The importance of human resources – Objective of Human Resource Management - Human
resource policies - Role of human resource manager.
UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Internal and External sources of Human Resources -
Recruitment - Selection – Socialization.
UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of training and Executive development methods – purpose – benefits.
UNIT IV EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Career Development - Mentor – Protege relationships.
UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Performance evaluation – Feedback - The control process – Importance – Methods – grievances –
Causes – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Students would have gained knowledge on the various aspects of HRM
CO2: Students will gain knowledge needed for success as a human resources professional.
CO3: Students will develop the skills needed for a successful HR manager.
CO4: Students would be prepared to implement the concepts learned in the
workplace.
CO5: Students would be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, "Human Resource Management", 8th Edition, Wiley, 2007.
2. John Bernardin. H., "Human Resource Management – An Experimental Approach", 5th
Edition,Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. Luis R,. Gomez-Mejia, DavidB. Balkin and Robert L. Cardy, “Managing Human Resources", 7th
Edition, PHI, 2012.
2. Dessler, "Human Resource Management", Pearson Education Limited, 2007.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 2.8 2.8 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.4 1 1.4 1 1 1.4 1
GE3755 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
• Learn the Evolution of Knowledge management.
• Be familiar with tools.
• Be exposed to Applications.
• Be familiar with some case studies.
Introduction: An Introduction to Knowledge Management - The foundations of knowledge
management- including cultural issues- technology applications organizational concepts and
processes- management aspects- and decision support systems. The Evolution of Knowledge
management: From Information Management to Knowledge Management - Key Challenges Facing
the Evolution of Knowledge Management - Ethics for Knowledge Management.
UNIT II CREATING THE CULTURE OF LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE

SHARING 9
Organization and Knowledge Management - Building the Learning Organization. Knowledge Markets:
Cooperation among Distributed Technical Specialists – Tacit Knowledge and Quality Assurance.
UNIT III KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT-THE TOOLS 9

Telecommunications and Networks in Knowledge Management - Internet Search Engines and
Knowledge Management - Information Technology in Support of Knowledge Management -
Knowledge Management and Vocabulary Control - Information Mapping in Information Retrieval -
Information Coding in the Internet Environment - Repackaging Information.
UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION 9

Components of a Knowledge Strategy - Case Studies (From Library to Knowledge Center, Knowledge
Management in the Health Sciences, Knowledge Management in Developing Countries).
UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced topics and case studies in knowledge management - Development of a knowledge
management map/plan that is integrated with an organization's strategic and business plan - A case
study on Corporate Memories for supporting various aspects in the process life -cycles of an
organization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Understand the process of acquiry knowledge from experts
CO2: Understand the learning organization.
CO3: Use the knowledge management tools.
CO4: Develop knowledge management Applications.
CO5: Design and develop enterprise applications.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1
2 2 1
3 2 2
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
AVg. 1 1.4 1 1 1.33
TEXT BOOK:
1. Srikantaiah, T.K., Koenig, M., “Knowledge Management for the Information Professional”
Information Today, Inc., 2000.
REFERENCE:
1. Nonaka, I., Takeuchi, H., “The Knowledge-Creating Company: How Japanese Companies
Create the Dynamics of Innovation”, Oxford University Press, 1995.
GE3792 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To study the basic concepts of management; approaches to management;
contributors to management studies; various forms of business organization
and trade unions function in professional organizations.
2 To study the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in
3 professional organization.
4 To study the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
5 To learn the organizational theory in professional organization.
6 To learn the principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in
professional organization.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9

Management: Introduction; Definition and Functions – Approaches to the study of Management –
Mintzberg’s Ten Managerial Roles – Principles of Taylor; Fayol; Weber; Parker – Forms of
Organization: Sole Proprietorship; Partnership; Company (Private and Public); Cooperative –
Public Sector Vs Private Sector Organization – Business Environment: Economic; Social; Political;
Legal – Trade Union: Definition; Functions; Merits & Demerits.
UNIT – II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT – I 9
Planning: Characteristics; Nature; Importance; Steps; Limitation; Planning Premises; Strategic
Planning; Vision & Mission statement in Planning– Organizing: Organizing Theory; Principles; Types;
Departmentalization; Centralization and Decentralization; Authority & Responsibility – Staffing:
Systems Approach; Recruiting and Selection Process; Human Resource Development (HRD)
Concept and Design.
UNIT – III FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT – II 9
Directing (Leading): Leadership Traits; Style; Morale; Managerial Grids (Blake-Mounton, Reddin) –
Communication: Purpose; Model; Barriers – Controlling: Process; Types; Levels; Guidelines; Audit
(External, Internal, Merits); Preventive Control – Decision Making: Elements; Characteristics; Nature;
Process; Classifications.
UNIT – IV ORGANIZATION THEORY 9

Organizational Conflict: Positive Aspects; Individual; Role; Interpersonal; Intra Group; Inter
Group; Conflict Management – Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory; Herzberg’s motivation-hygiene
theory; McClelland’s three needs motivation theory; Vroom’s valence-expectancy theory – Change
Management: Concept of Change; Lewin’s Process of Change Model; Sources of Resistance;
Overcoming Resistance; Guidelines to managing Conflict.
UNIT – V PRODUCTIVITY AND MODERN TOPICS 9

Productivity: Concept; Measurements; Affecting Factors; Methods to Improve – Modern Topics
(concept, feature/characteristics, procedure, merits and demerits): Business Process Reengineering
(BPR); Benchmarking; SWOT/SWOC Analysis; Total Productive Maintenance; Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP); Management of Information Systems (MIS).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Explain basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors to
management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function in
professional organizations.
CO2 Discuss the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
CO3 Apply the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in professional
organization.
CO4 Discuss the organizational theory in professional organization.
CO5 Apply principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Govindarajan and S. Natarajan, “Principles of Management”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
2009.
2. Koontz. H. and Weihrich. H., “Essentials of Management: An International Perspective”, 8th
Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph J, Massie, “Essentials of Management”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 1987.
2. Saxena, P. K., “Principles of Management: A Modern Approach”, Global India Publications,
2009.
3. S.Chandran, “Organizational Behaviours”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
4. Richard L. Daft, “Organization Theory and Design”, South Western College Publishing, 11th
Edition, 2012.
5. S. TrevisCerto, “Modern Management Concepts and Skills”, Pearson Education, 2018.
C PO PSO
O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
MANDATORY COURSES I
MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000
COURSE OUTLINE
UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.
UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.
UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America.
Women’s Movement in India.
UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender. Gender
and narratives.
UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.
Gender and Representation in Alternative Media. Gender

and social media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC

3 000
OBJECTIVE:
• To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence through
an art form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature as
suitable modes of expressing human experience.
1. COURSE CONTENTS
Introduction to Elements of Literature
1. Relevance of literature
a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.
b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.
c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.
d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.
2. Elements of fiction
a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.
b) Fictional modes and patterns.
c) Plot character and perspective.
3. Elements of poetry
a) Emotions and imaginations.
b) Figurative language.
c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).
d) Personification and animation.
e) Rhetoric and trend.
4. Elements of drama
a) Drama as representational art.
b) Content mode and elements.
c) Theatrical performance.
d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.
e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.
3. READINGS:
1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.
2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.
3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv Press,
1991.
4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.
5. The Elements of Drama, J.L.Styan, Literary Licensing, 2011.
3.1 Textbook:
3.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual
student so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.
4. OTHER SESSION:
4.1*Tutorials:
4.2*Laboratory:
4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular piece
of literature
5. *ASSESSMENT:
5.1 HA:
5.2 Quizzes-HA:
5.3 Periodical Examination: one
5.4 Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of
poetry, fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given
context; sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.
5.5 Final Exam:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
• Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and
appreciate its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.
MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LTPC

3 000
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of film
as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over a
century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances of a
film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.
Theme - A: The Component of Films
A-1: The material and equipment
A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film
Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language
B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.
B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies
Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation
C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation
Theme – D: Development of Films
D-1: Representative Soviet films
D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system
Theme - E: Indian Films
E-1: The early era
E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India
READING:
A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.
MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
• To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction, disaster
management
• To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response
UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc – Technological
disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts including social,
Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster vulnerability profile of India
and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics, Complex emergencies, - -,
Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable development Goals
UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures,
Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local Bodies
(PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories from
Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and Local
resources.
UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation, rehabilitation
and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management – Compensation and
Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmers
and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and Central Level- (NDMA –SDMA-
DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)
UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9
Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role of
GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response and
Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for disaster
Management
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9

Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and field
works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-13:
978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt. Ltd.,
2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment prevention
and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential Disaster response in
areas where they live, with due sensitivity
CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
MANDATORY COURSES II
MX3085 WELL-BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA

AND SIDDHA LT PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health also
• To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
• To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
• To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
• To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health
disorders
UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4

Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than
treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health - Financial
health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health - Environmental
health - Occupational/Professional heath.
Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases - Non-
communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer – diabetes
- chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of physical
activities.
Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.
Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care of
health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time
Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet according
to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) - Maintaining BMI-
Importance and actions to be taken
UNIT II DIET 4+6

Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day - nutrients
one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent diet-related
illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy weight - helps to
reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis – hypertension – PCOD – infertility
– ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart diseases - keeps the teeth and bones
strong.
Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.
Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions
Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM
Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method
UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH as a
soft therapy.
Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation and
healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.
Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory - Pancheekarana
Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-Dosha Theory) -
Udal Thathukkal
Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine

Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the rate
of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary Prevention - To
decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.
UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4

Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health - Role
of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading a
healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.
Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life - Identifying
the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training, professional help)
- Complications of stress mismanagement.
Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.
Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity
UNIT V YOGA 2+12

Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for individuals
according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and prevention of
health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your
Body, by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California
REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard D.
Roberts
A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England
2. The Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D, Published
by The Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh Avenue, Suite 1200,
New York, NY 10001
1. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC4799645/
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/diet-nutrition/changing-habits-better-
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20to
%20cook.
3. Read more: https://www.legit.ng/1163909-classes-food-examples-functions.html
4. https://www.yaclass.in/p/science-state-board/class-9/nutrition-and-health-5926
5. Benefits of healthy eating https://www.cdc.gov/nutrition/resources-
publications/benefits-of-healthy-eating.html
6. Food additives
https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/food-additives
7. BMI https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/healthy-weight/
https://www.who.int/europe/news-room/fact-sheets/item/a-healthy-lifestyle---who-
recommendations
8. Yoga https://www.healthifyme.com/blog/types-of-yoga/
https://yogamedicine.com/guide-types-yoga-styles/
Ayurveda : https://vikaspedia.in/health/ayush/ayurveda-1/concept-of-healthy-living-in-
ayurveda
9. Siddha : http://www.tkdl.res.in/tkdl/langdefault/Siddha/Sid_Siddha_Concepts.asp
10. CAM : https://www.hindawi.com/journals/ecam/2013/376327/
11. Preventive herbs : https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3847409/
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Learn the importance of different components of health
• Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
• Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
• Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health
MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
UNIT-I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES

Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation verses
evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.
UNIT-II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S. Irfan
Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.
UNIT-III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times Science
and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.
UNIT-IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest
UNIT-V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA
Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions
UNIT-VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA

Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology Science
and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC

3 0 00
Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)
OBJECTIVES:
• This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how different
political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end with a critique of
different systems and their implementations in the past, with possible future directions.
COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self, harmony
in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)
(Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)
Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)
(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)
Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)
Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.
(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)
Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)
Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)
(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)
Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)
(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)
Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)
Conclusion (2 lectures)
Total lectures: 39
Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books
Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be provided.
GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy,
political and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires with
some case studies of how different attempts have been made in the past and how
they have fared.
MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its main
organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing contours
in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students with the
main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in India,
reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the Constitution of India
and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and issues concerning
national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the contemporary context with the
aim of developing a future vision for a better India.
TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.
Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.
Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.
1857 and the national awakening.
1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its legacies.
Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy. Why
a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.
Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future scenario.
What can we do?
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building in
India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in correct
perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the system
with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who is often
left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of dissatisfaction and
difficulties for the system.
SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy, Picador
India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.
MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVES
• To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
• To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
• To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
• To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
• To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.
UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES
Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) - Short
Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and chronic
Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety Policy-Material
Safety Data Sheet MSDS
UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006
UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES

Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action Plan-
Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment
UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY

Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety- Toxic
gas Release
UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES
Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk Assessment-
Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification and Risk
Assessment
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Course outcomes
on completion of this course the student will be able:
• Understand the basic concept of safety.
• Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
• Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
• Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
• Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.
TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education
REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process Industries.Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA
ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization https://www.iso.org/standard/63787.html
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.14489.1998.pdf
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.15656.2006.pdf

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Understand the
CO1 basic concept of 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
safety.
Obtain knowledge
CO2 of Statutory
2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Regulations and
standards.
Know about the
CO3 safety Activities of 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
the Working Place.
Analyze on the
CO4 impact of
Occupational 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and
their Remedies
Obtain knowledge
CO5 of Risk
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Assessment
Techniques.
Industrial safety 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II
OCS351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING FUNDAMENTALS LTPC

202 3
OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
1. Understand the importance, principles, and search methods of AI
2. Provide knowledge on predicate logic and Prolog.
3. Introduce machine learning fundamentals
4. Study of supervised learning algorithms.
5. Study about unsupervised learning algorithms.
UNIT I INTELLIGENT AGENT AND UNINFORMED SEARCH 6

Introduction - Foundations of AI - History of AI - The state of the art - Risks and Benefits of AI -
Intelligent Agents - Nature of Environment - Structure of Agent - Problem Solving Agents -
Formulating Problems - Uninformed Search - Breadth First Search - Dijkstra's algorithm or uniform-
cost search - Depth First Search - Depth Limited Search
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING WITH SEARCH TECHNIQUES 6
Informed Search - Greedy Best First - A* algorithm - Adversarial Game and Search - Game theory -
Optimal decisions in game - Min Max Search algorithm - Alpha-beta pruning - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems (CSP) - Examples - Map Coloring - Job Scheduling - Backtracking Search for
CSP
UNIT III LEARNING 6
Machine Learning: Definitions – Classification - Regression - approaches of machine learning models
- Types of learning - Probability - Basics - Linear Algebra – Hypothesis space and inductive bias,
Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross validation, Concept of over fitting, under fitting, Bias and
Variance - Regression: Linear Regression - Logistic Regression
UNIT IV SUPERVISED LEARNING 6
Neural Network: Introduction, Perceptron Networks – Adaline - Back propagation networks -
Decision Tree: Entropy – Information gain - Gini Impurity - classification algorithm - Rule based
Classification - Naïve Bayesian classification - Support Vector Machines (SVM)
UNIT V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Unsupervised Learning – Principle Component Analysis - Neural Network: Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets - Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps – Clustering: Definition - Types of
Clustering – Hierarchical clustering algorithms – k-means algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Programs for Problem solving with Search
1. Implement breadth first search
2. Implement depth first search
3. Analysis of breadth first and depth first search in terms of time and space
4. Implement and compare Greedy and A* algorithms.
Supervised learning
5. Implement the non-parametric locally weighted regression algorithm in order to fit data points.
Select appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs
6. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based algorithm.
7. Build an artificial neural network by implementing the back propagation algorithm and test the
same using appropriate data sets.
8. Write a program to implement the naïve Bayesian classifier.
Unsupervised learning
9. Implementing neural network using self-organizing maps
10. Implementing k-Means algorithm to cluster a set of data.
11. Implementing hierarchical clustering algorithm.
Note:
• Installation of gnu-prolog, Study of Prolog (gnu-prolog).
• The programs can be implemented in using C++/JAVA/ Python or appropriate tools can be used
by designing good user interface
• Data sets can be taken from standard repositories
(https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets.html) or constructed by the students.
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the foundations of AI and the structure of Intelligent Agents
CO2: Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
CO3: Study of learning methods
CO4: Solving problem using Supervised learning
CO5: Solving problem using Unsupervised learning
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Fourth
Edition, 2021
2. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing-Wiley India.3 rd ed,
REFERENCES
1. Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.
2. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
3. C. Muller & Sarah Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.
OCS352 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS LTPC

2 023
OBJECTIVES:
• To apprise students with basic knowledge of IoT that paves a platform to understand physical
and logical design of IOT
• To teach a student how to analyse requirements of various communication models and
protocols for cost-effective design of IoT applications on different IoT platforms.
• To introduce the technologies behind Internet of Things(IoT).
• To explain the students how to code for an IoT application using Arduino/Raspberry Pi open
platform.
• To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Evolution of Internet of Things – Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT Models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack – Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT
UNIT II COMPONENTS IN INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Functional Blocks of an IoT Ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects – Control Units -
Communication modules (Bluetooth, Zigbee,Wifi, GPS, GSM Modules)
UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES BEHIND IOT 6

IOT Protocols - IPv6, 6LoWPAN, MQTT, CoAP - RFID, Wireless Sensor Networks, BigData
Analytics, Cloud Computing, Embedded Systems.
UNIT IV OPEN PLATFORMS AND PROGRAMMING 7

IOT deployment for Raspberry Pi /Arduino platform-Architecture –Programming – Interfacing –
Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting to the Cloud.
UNIT V IOT APPLICATIONS 7
Business models for the internet of things, Smart city, Smart mobility and transport, Industrial IoT,
Smart health, Environment monitoring and surveillance – Home Automation – Smart Agriculture
30 PERIODS
1. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
2. Interfacing Arduino to Zigbee module
3. Interfacing Arduino to GSM module
4. Interfacing Arduino to Bluetooth Module
5 Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
6. Interfacing sensors to Raspberry PI
7. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
8. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
9. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
10.Design an IOT based system
OUTCOMES:
CO 1:Explain the concept of IoT.
CO 2:Understand the communication models and various protocols for IoT.
CO 3:Design portable IoT using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform
CO 4:Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
CO 5:Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”,
CISCO Press, 2017
2. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, 2015
REFERENCES
1. Perry Lea, “Internet of things for architects”, Packt, 2018
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
3. IOT (Internet of Things) Programming: A Simple and Fast Way of Learning, IOT Kindle Edition.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities Press,
2015
6. https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet
OCS353 DATA SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Familiarize students with the data science process.
● Understand the data manipulation functions in Numpy and Pandas.
● Explore different types of machine learning approaches.
● Understand and practice visualization techniques using tools.
● Learn to handle large volumes of data with case studies.
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model –
presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic statistical
descriptions of Data
UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION 9
Python Shell - Jupyter Notebook - IPython Magic Commands - NumPy Arrays-Universal Functions –
Aggregations – Computation on Arrays – Fancy Indexing – Sorting arrays – Structured data – Data
manipulation with Pandas – Data Indexing and Selection – Handling missing data – Hierarchical
indexing – Combining datasets – Aggregation and Grouping – String operations – Working with time
series – High performance
UNIT III MACHINE LEARNING 5

The modeling process - Types of machine learning - Supervised learning - Unsupervised learning -
Semi-supervised learning- Classification, regression - Clustering – Outliers and Outlier Analysis
UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION 5

Importing Matplotlib – Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and
contour plots – Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization –
three dimensional plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn
UNIT V HANDLING LARGE DATA 5

Problems - techniques for handling large volumes of data - programming tips for dealing with large
data sets- Case studies: Predicting malicious URLs, Building a recommender system - Tools and
techniques needed - Research question - Data preparation - Model building – Presentation and
automation.
30 PERIODS
LAB EXERCISES
1. Download, install and explore the features of Python for data analytics.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Basic plots using Matplotlib
5. Statistical and Probability measures
a) Frequency distributions
b) Mean, Mode, Standard Deviation
c) Variability
d) Normal curves
e) Correlation and scatter plots
f) Correlation coefficient
g) Regression
6. Use the standard benchmark data set for performing the following:
a) Univariate Analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b) Bivariate Analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling.
7. Apply supervised learning algorithms and unsupervised learning algorithms on any data set.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on any data set.
Note: Example data sets like: UCI, Iris, Pima Indians Diabetes etc.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on data science process.
CO2: Perform data manipulation functions using Numpy and Pandas.
CO3 Understand different types of machine learning approaches.
CO4: Perform data visualization using tools.
CO5: Handle large volumes of data in practical scenarios.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”, Manning
Publications, 2016.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea Press,2014.
CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
• To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the development
of AR/VR enabled applications.
• To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
• To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
• To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human Auditory
System.
UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface Deformation
– Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model Management.
UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6
VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications –
Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in Robotics –
Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.
UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5
Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS

1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures over
them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full haptic
interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2: Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3: Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4: Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5: Develop AR/VR applications in different domains
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003
OPEN ELCTIVE III
OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE DESCRIPTION:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these examinations.
OBJECTIVES:
• To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
• To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills to
tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
• To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
• To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
• To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication
UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal reasoning
- Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage – Synonyms-antonyms –
Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly confused words – Spellings –
Word expansion – New words in use.
UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences –
Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement – Voice
– Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.
UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.
UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types of
essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose – Structure,
Content and Style.
UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and intonation
- Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases – Interactive
communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions – Giving an
oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself - Utterance –
Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
• Expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range of
texts with the emphasis required
• Identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
• Understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
• Communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
• Write topic based essays with precision and accuracy
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using multimedia.
Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%
TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2008.
Websites
http://www.examenglish.com/, http://www.ets.org/ , http://www.bankxams.com/
http://civilservicesmentor.com/, http://www.educationobserver.com
http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• to understand the importance of sustainable development
• to acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control and
environmental management
• to comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9

Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects of
Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes
UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development, Non-
renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability, Nuclear
resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development: Programme
and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators
UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies
UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution, Environmental
Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal Protection of
Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing environmental laws,
Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining
sustainable development
CO2 Have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO 3 Present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO 4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO 5 understand the environmental legislations
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in international
environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient BlackSwan,
India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.
OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT-I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local Governance
UNIT-II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,
UNIT-III (9)
Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers Associations,
etc.
UNIT- IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors,
E‐governance
UNIT-V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. J.Dreze and A.Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.
CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
2 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
3 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
4 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
5 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.
UNIT – I ENERGY SCENARIO 9
Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy status-
Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy consumption -
Future energy plans
UNIT – II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems –
Solar PV applications.
UNIT – III WIND ENERGY 9
Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine – Wind
turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues - Applications.
UNIT – IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical conversion-
mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration –-
Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol production -
Applications.
UNIT – V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9
Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants – Applications -
Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
• Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
• Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
• Explain the various wind energy technologies.
• Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
• Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy | Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-10 :
9390385636
2. Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707
REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha
Science Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
• Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
• development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
• use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
• Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
• Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems
UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9
Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies
UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9

Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user, User
persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and field visit
UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9

Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design
UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9

Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution concept;
explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and feasibility.
Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution concepts
UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
● Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
● Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
● Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario
TEXT BOOKS
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos, (2014),
Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.
REFERENCES
1. https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking#process
2. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-49f253ca86
24
3. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
5. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85
MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
• Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
• Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
• Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
• Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
• Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate 3D
model
UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9

Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering - Surface
and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.
UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9

.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength – Hardness
–Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally Induced Failure
Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis - Manufacturing Process
Verification.
UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis –
Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.
UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques for
Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by step
procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry. Case
studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.Legality: Patent – Copyrights –Trade
Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
• Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
• Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
• Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system compatibility in
• Analyze the various legal aspect
• Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.
AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general
aspects of Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling,
sizing, and sub system design and hybrid vehicle control.
UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle.
Various Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design,
Electric Vehicle Recharging and Refuelling Systems.
UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9
Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium
ion- Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick
Charging devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel
cell. Ultra capacitors. Battery Management System.
UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9
Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance
motors working principle, construction and characteristics.
UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9
Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC
- Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor,
PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –
operating modes
UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different
configurations of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles -
Operation modes - Control Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case
study on specification of electric and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
2. Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
3. Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
4. Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
5. Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”,
CRCPress,2005.
REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
• To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
• To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
• To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
• To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.
UNIT – I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability
UNIT – II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9

Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental issues
pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce costs -
Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability
UNIT – III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9

Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of sustainable
practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of sustainability
indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –Cost and time
model.
UNIT – IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9
Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.
UNIT – V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016, ISBN-
13: 978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN: 978-
1-848-21212-1.
REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United
States, ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United States,
2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.
COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
➢ Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
➢ Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
➢ Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
➢ Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
➢ Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.
UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6
History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.
UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity profile -
Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and geometry -
Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.
UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9

Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.
UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10

Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.
UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10

History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital elements
- Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
• Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
• Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
• Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
• Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John Wiley,
NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective " American
Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.
REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.
OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
• To understand the approaches to the study of Management
• To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
• To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
• To know about the Supply Chain Management’
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of Directors
- Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade Union
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9
Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises - Decision
Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and staff -
Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement - Performance
appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing human factor -
Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling techniques, productivity
and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.
UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9
Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception - Organizational
Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories - Process Theories - Job
Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and approaches.
UNIT IV GROUPDYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process - Barriers
to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal characteristics –
Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role in Group Decision,
Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations and conflict, Organization
centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal - Organizational Structures Organizational
Change and Development -Change Process – Resistance to Change - Culture and Ethics.
UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4 : Analyze the learning curves
CO5 : Understand the placement and performance appraisal
REFERENCES:
1. Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6
OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
• Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its techniques.
• Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
• Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
• Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function
UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control charts
for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and application.
UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9

Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart, Xchart
with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and exponentially weighted
moving average control charts.
UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
chart.Gauge capability studies,setting specification limits.
UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1
5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1
OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1:To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
2:To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for non-
combustibility & fire resistance
3:To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
4:To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to fire
damage.
5:To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic and quality-
based study programmes
UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the properties
of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural materials on
fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.
UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9
Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence of
fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-standard
heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.
UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local barriers;
Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low combustible,
Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight sealing of
doors;
UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9

Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire protection
of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged structures-
Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair techniques- repair
methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel structural members,
Repair to masonry structures.
UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9

Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs -
Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1:Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2:Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating of
a building.
CO3:To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4:To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and their
repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5:Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth Heinemann,
Oxford, UK,2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
2. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New York,
U.S.A.1983.
3. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010. 4.
Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth Edition ,1999
4. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -
OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.
• Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes and
standards.
• Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
• Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
• Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9
Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical testing,
Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental factors, visual
perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and fibroscopes – light
sources and special lighting.
UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers and
cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.
UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9
Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9
Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes, EMAT.
Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of scanning and
displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique, Thickness
determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations, calibration.
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages &
Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9
Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and screens,
Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real Time, CT scan).
Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure charts,
Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.
2. Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
3. Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
4. Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for better
evaluation.
5. Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the influence of
various parameters on the testing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.
2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata McGraw-
Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.
PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3
OMR351 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
2. Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret and
develop programs.
3. Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
4. Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
5. Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9

Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of
Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges –
Eddy Current Sensor – Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.
UNIT – II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085.
UNIT – III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9

Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and
DAC Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.
UNIT – IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9
Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters
and Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.
UNIT – V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics,
Stages of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design
Concepts with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot –
Engine Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2:Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also
interpret and develop programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with
microprocessor.
CO 4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO 5: Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with
the 8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and
Hall, 1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.
ORA351 FOUNDATION OF ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To study the kinematics, drive systems and programming of robots.
2. To study the basics of robot laws and transmission systems.
3. To familiarize students with the concepts and techniques of robot manipulator, its
kinematics.
4. To familiarize students with the various Programming and Machine Vision application in
robots.
5. To build confidence among students to evaluate, choose and incorporate robots in
engineering systems.
UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9

Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate systems, Work Envelope, types and
classification – specifications – Pitch, yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load –
Robot Parts and their functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications.
UNIT – II ROBOT KINEMATICS 9
Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and the difference: forward kinematics and inverse
Kinematics of Manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees
of freedom (in 3 dimensional) – derivations and problems. Homogeneous transformation
matrices, translation and rotation matrices.
UNIT – III ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo
Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of
All These Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic
Grippers, Magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, internal grippers and external grippers, selection
and design considerations of a gripper
UNIT – IV SENSORS IN ROBOTICS 9
Force sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity sensors, non-contact sensors, safety
considerations in robotic cell, proximity sensors, fail safe hazard sensor systems, and
compliance mechanism. Machine vision system - camera, frame grabber, sensing and
digitizing image data – signal conversion, image storage, lighting techniques, image processing
and analysis – data reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition, other
algorithms, applications – Inspection, identification, visual serving and navigation.
UNIT – V PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS OF ROBOT 9

Teach pendant programming, lead through programming, robot programming languages – VAL
programming – Motion Commands, Sensors commands, End-Effector Commands, and simple
programs - Role of robots in inspection, assembly, material handling, underwater, space and
medical fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the features of robots and technology involved in the control.
CO2: Apply the basic engineering knowledge and laws for the design of robotics.
CO3: Explain the basic concepts like various configurations, classification and parts of end
effectors compare various end effectors and grippers and tools and sensors used in robots.
CO4: Explain the concept of kinematics, degeneracy, dexterity and trajectory planning.
CO5: Demonstrate the image processing and image analysis techniques by machine vision
system.
COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO &
PSO
Average
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ganesh.S.Hedge,”A textbook of Industrial Robotics”, Lakshmi Publications, 2006.
2. Mikell.P.Groover , “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and applications”
McGraw Hill 2ND edition 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Fu K.S. Gonalz R.C. and ice C.S.G.”Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill book co. 2007.
2. YoramKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book, Co., 2002.
3. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill 2005.
4. John. J.Craig, “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control” 2nd Edition, 2002.
5. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control”, Springer India
reprint, 2010.
OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
• To learn the different component systems and functions
• To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
• To learn the basics of different structures & construction
• To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts
UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8
Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.
UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.
UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9

Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.
UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.
UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9
Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust production-
Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Illustrate the history of aircraft & developments over the years
• Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
• Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
• Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
• Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. . E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.
REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS Kataraia &
sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989
OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
• To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements of
data interpretation
UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s Boltzmann
law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities
UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for vegetation,
soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.
UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9

Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital perturbations
and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne platforms and Space
borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and Geosynchronous satellites –
Lagrange Orbit.
UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites
UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9
Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –- selection
and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -Digital
interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image classification
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO 1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO 2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
CO 3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO 4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO 5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, American Society of
Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van Zyl,
2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011
CO-PO MAPPING
PO Graduate Attribute Course Outcome

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions
OAI351 URBAN AGRICULTURE LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the students the principles of agricultural crop production and the production
practices of crops in modern ways.
• To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production practices.
Benefits of urban agriculture- economic benefits, environmental benefits, social and cultural benefits,
educational, skill-building and job training benefits, health, nutrition and food accessibility benefits.
UNIT II VERTICAL FARMING 9
Vertical farming- types, green facade, living/green wall-modular green wall , vegetated mat wall-
Structures and components for green wall system: plant selection, growing media, irrigation and plant
nutrition: Design, light, benefits of vertical gardening. Roof garden and its types. Kitchen garden,
hanging baskets: The house plants/ indoor plants
UNIT III SOIL LESS CULTIVATION 9
Hydroponics, aeroponics, aquaponics: merits and limitations, costs and Challenges, backyard
gardens- tactical gardens- street landscaping- forest gardening, greenhouses, urban
beekeeping
UNIT IV MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Growth of plants in vertical pipes in terraces and inside buildings, micro irrigation concepts suitable for
roof top gardening, rain hose system, Green house, polyhouse and shade net system of crop
production on roof tops
UNIT V WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Concept, scope and maintenance of waste management- recycle of organic waste, garden wastes-
solid waste management-scope, microbiology of waste, other ingredients like insecticide, pesticides
and fungicides residues, waste utilization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Demonstrate the principles behind crop production and various parameters that influences the crop
growth on roof tops
2. Explain different methods of crop production on roof tops
3. Explain nutrient and pest management for crop production on roof tops
4. Illustrate crop water requirement and irrigation water management on roof tops
5. Explain the concept of waste management on roof tops
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martellozzo F and J S Landry. 2020. Urban Agriculture. Scitus Academics Llc.
2. Rob Roggema. 2016. Sustainable Urban Agriculture and Food Planning. Routledge Taylor and
Francis Group.
3. Akrong M O. 2012. Urban Agriculture. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing.
REFERENCES:
1. Agha Rokh A. 2008. Evaluation of ornamental flowers and fishes breeding in Bushehr urban
wastewater using a pilot-scale aquaponic system. Water and Wastewater, 19 (65): 47–53.
2. Agrawal M, Singh B, Rajput M, Marshall F and Bell J. N. B. 2003. Effect of air pollution on peri-
urban agriculture: A case study. Environmental Pollution, 126 (3): 323–329.
https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0269749103002458#aep-section-id24.
3. Jac Smit and Joe Nasr. 1992. Urban agriculture for sustainable cities: using wastes and idle land
and water bodies as resources. Environment and Urbanization, 4 (2):141-152.
CO-PO MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall

correlation of
COs with POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 1 1 3 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 2 1 1
Complex Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 2 1
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 2 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 2 1 2
linkage.
OEN351 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
• To equip the students with the principles and design of water treatment units and
distribution system.
UNIT I SOURCES OF WATER 9

Public water supply system – Planning, Objectives, Design period, Population forecasting; Water
demand – Sources of water and their characteristics, Surface and Groundwater – Impounding
Reservoir – Development and selection of source – Source Water quality – Characterization –
Significance – Drinking Water quality standards.
UNIT II CONVEYANCE FROM THE SOURCE 9

Water supply – intake structures – Functions; Pipes and conduits for water – Pipe materials –
Hydraulics of flow in pipes – Transmission main design – Laying, jointing and testing of pipes –
appurtenances – Types and capacity of pumps – Selection of pumps and pipe materials.
UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives – Unit operations and processes – Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation –- sand filters - Disinfection -–
Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects.
UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9
Water softening – Desalination- R.O. Plant – demineralization – Adsorption - Ion exchange–
Membrane Systems - Iron and Manganese removal - Defluoridation - Construction and Operation
and Maintenance aspects
UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY 9

Requirements of water distribution – Components – Selection of pipe material – Service reservoirs -
Functions – Network design – Economics - Computer applications – Appurtenances – Leak detection
- Principles of design of water supply in buildings – House service connection – Fixtures and
fittings, systems of plumbing and types of plumbing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO1: An understanding of water quality criteria and standards, and their relation to public
health
CO2: The ability to design the water conveyance system
CO3: The knowledge in various unit operations and processes in water treatment
CO4: An ability to understand the various systems for advanced water treatment
CO5: An insight into the structure of drinking water distribution system
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Garg. S.K., "Water Supply Engineering", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, September 2008.
2. Punmia B.C, Arun K.Jain, Ashok K.Jain, “ Water supply Engineering” Lakshmi publication private
limited, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Rangwala "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", February 2022
4. Birdie.G.S., "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2018.
REFERENCES :
1. Fair. G.M., Geyer.J.C., "Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal", John Wiley and Sons, 1954.
2. Babbit.H.E, and Donald.J.J, "Water Supply Engineering" , McGraw Hill book Co, 1984.
3. Steel. E.W.et al., "Water Supply Engineering" , Mc Graw Hill International book Co, 1984.
4. Duggal. K.N., “Elememts of public Health Engineering”, S.Chand and Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 1998.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 1 2 3 1
Avg. 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
• To understand the basics of power converters
• To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
• To understand the architecture and power train components.
• To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical vehicles
(HEVs)
UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9
Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC and
AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of special
machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.
UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled rectifiers,
controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three phase inverters,
Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.
UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9
Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction motor
and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives
UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN
COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal Combustion
Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) – Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches, Transmission and
Brakes.
UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF
VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory control -
Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode - regeneration mode -
series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric vehicles.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3
REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition, 10 th
Impression 2021.
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY, 2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition, Wiley,
2012
OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
2. Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
3. Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
4. Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
5. Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9

Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC Types.
UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function Block
functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.
UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing, registers
basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison functions, data
handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions, sequencer
instructions
UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: - Hardware
and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function Chart/
Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Applications,
PHI publication
REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
2. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
3. https://www.etf.ues.rs.ba/~slubura/Procesni%20racunari/Programmable%20Logic%20Controlle
rs%20Programming%20Methods.pdf
MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9
OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T PC

3 0 03
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical, optical and
magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and applications.
Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of nanomaterials- Nano
catalysis.
UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8
Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods – sol gel
technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase condensation, magnetron
sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation, sputtering.
UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10
Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of composites-
metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and elastomer based-
influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.
UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10
Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice- clusters
of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques, Diffraction methods,
thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9
Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics – Nanobots-
Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications- Practice of
nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 Able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 Describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 Understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 Develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “ Nano
Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial
College Press, 2004
3. William A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition, CRC
Taylor and Francis group 2012.
REFERENCES
1. R.H.J.Hannink & A.J.Hill, Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing Ltd.,Cambridge,
2006.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl & Co
3. Ivor Brodie and Julius J.Muray,’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer
International Edition,2010
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 understand the basic 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
properties such as
structural, physical,
chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their
applications
CO2 acquire knowledge 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
about the different
types of nano material
synthesis
CO3 describes about the 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
shape, size,structure of
composite nano
materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
different
characterization
techniques for
nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
knowledge in the
application of
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer electronics
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the functions,
Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials, Functional Diversity of
Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal Impact.
UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9

Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few Case
Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly, Directed Assembly-
Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological Applications of SAMs.
UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9

Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet, Synovial fluid,
‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs, Biomineralization- En route
to Nanotechnology.
UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9

Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart Gels and
Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical Limitations and
Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube composities.
UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9

Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs, Illustrated
Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design Considerations, Polymer
FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering Aspects of Flat Panel Displays,
Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs. Polymer-
based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select
appropriate material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and potential of
functional material.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).
REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.
OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
• To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and patterns in
India with focus on traditional foods.
UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9
Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and pastoralization,
origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance, food as religious
and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture - variability, diversity, from
basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions on food habits, heterogeneity
within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive occasions, specific religious
festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and other fasts.
UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9
Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter and
ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency, yield,
shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation – sundrying,
osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.
UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9

Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of India.Regional foods that have gone
Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and preserves,
beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods
UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9

Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and garlic
pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.
UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9

Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes:
East West Books, 2001.
OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
• The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This course
will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the producer,
manufacturer and consumer.
UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods, sea
weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives; need
and significance of processing these foods.
UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of raw
and processed foods.
UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and curing
with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion cooking, snack
foods.
UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting and
installing necessary equipment.
UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.
TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.
OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property Rights
in national and international level.
• To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
• This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.
UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.
UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL

INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL). Geographical
Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.
UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9
Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.
UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World Trade
Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related Aspects of
Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law, Practice
and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T. CIPRA,
NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech open
access, Croatia, 2017.
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will be able to
C1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
C2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
C3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
C4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
C5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
C6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on International
Society
CO – PO MAPPING
IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2
OTT351 BASICS OF TEXTILE FINISHING LT PC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To enable the students to understand the basics and different types of finishes required for
textile materials and machines used for finishing.
UNIT I RESIN FINISHING 9

Importance of finishing and its classification. Resin finishing: Mechanism of creasing, Types of Resins
.Anti crease, wash and wear, durable press resin finishing. Study about eco friendly method of anti
crease finishing.
UNIT II FLAME PROOF & WATERPROOF 9

Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy. Flame retardant finishes for cotton, Concept of
waterproof and water repellent Finishes, Durable & Semi durable and Temporary finishes, Concept of
Antimicrobial finish.
UNIT III SOIL RELEASE AND ANTISTATIC FINISHES 9

Soil Release Finishing: Mechanism of soil retention & soil release. Anti pilling Finishing: chemical and
mechanical methods to produce anti pilling. Concept of UV Protection finishes- Concept of antistatic
finishes.
UNIT IV MECHANICAL FINISHES 9

Mechanical finishing of textile materials - calendaring, compacting, Sanforising, Peach finishing.
Object of Heat setting. Various methods of heat setting and mechanism of heat setting.
UNIT V STIFFENING AND SOFTENING 9

Concept of stiffening and softening of textile materials. Mechanism in the weight reduction of PET
.Concept of Micro encapsulation techniques in finishing process, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment and
Bio finishing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO: 1 Basics of Resin Finishing Process.
CO: 2 Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy, waterproof and water repellent, Antimicrobial
finishes.
CO: 3 Concept of Soil Release, Anti Pilling, UV Protection and Antistatic finishes.
CO: 4 Concept of Mechanical finishing.
CO: 5 Basics of Micro encapsulation techniques, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.A.Shennai, "Technology of Finishing", Vol X, Sevak Publications, Mumbai
2. Perkins, W.S., “Textile colouration and finishing”, Carolina Academic Press., U.K, ISBN:
0890898855.2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Microencapsulation in finishing, Review of progress of Colouration, SDC, 2001 62
2. Chakraborty, J.N, Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles, Woodhead Publishing
India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. W. D. Schindler and P. J. Hauser "Chemical finishing of textiles", Woodhead Publishing Cambridge
England,2004.
OTT352 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering and different tools of
industrial engineering and its application in apparel industry
Scope of industrial engineering in apparel Industry, role of industrial engineers.
Productivity: Definition - Productivity, Productivity measures .Reduction of work content due to the
product and process, Reduction of ineffective time due to the management, due to the worker.
Causes for low productivity in apparel industry and measures for improvement.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Definition, Purpose, Basic procedure and techniques of work-study.
Work environment – Lighting, Ventilation, Climatic condition on productivity.
Temperature control, humidity control, noise control measures. Safety and ergonomics on
work station and work environment
Material Handling – Objectives, Classification and characteristics of material handling
equipments, Specialized material handling equipments.
UNIT III METHOD STUDY 9

Definition, Objectives, Procedure, Process charts and symbols. Various charts – Charts
indicating process sequence: Outline process chart, flow process chart (man type, material type and
equipment type); Charts using time scale – multiple activity chart. Diagrams indicating movement –
flow diagram, string diagram, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph, travel chart
MOTION STUDY: Principle of motion economy, Two handed process chart, micro motion analysis
– therbligs, SIMO chart.
UNIT IV WORK MEASUREMENT 9

Definition, purpose, procedure, equipments, techniques. Time study - Definition, basics of time
study- equipments. Time study forms, Stop watch procedure. Predetermined motion time
standards (PMTS). Time Study rating, calculation of standard time, Performance rating – relaxation
and other allowances. Calculation of SAM for different garments, GSD.
UNIT V WORK STUDY APPLICATION 9

Application of work study techniques in cutting, stitching and packing in garment industry. Workaids
in sewing, Pitch diagram, Line balancing, Capacity planning, scientific method of training.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Fundamental concepts of industrial Engineering and productivity
CO2: Method study
CO3: Motion analysis CO4: Work measurement and SAM
CO5: Ergonomics and its application to garment industry
TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study “, ILO, Geneva, 1996, ISBN: 9221071081
|ISBN-13: 9789221071082
2. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989, ISBN:
0898740444 | ISBN-13: 9780898740448
3. Khanna O. P., and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, 2010, ISBN: 818992835X / ISBN: 978-8189928353
REFERENCES
1. Norberd Lloyd Enrick., “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley
Eastern (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1988, ISBN: 0882756311 | ISBN-13: 9780882756318
2. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Wiley-Black well
Science, U.S. A., 1995, ISBN: 0632039396 | ISBN-13: 9780632039395
3. GordanaColovic., “Ergonomics in the garment industry”, Wood publishing India Pvt.
Ltd., India, 2014, ISBN: 0857098225 | ISBN-13: 9780857098221
4. Rajesh Bheda, “Managing Productivity in Apparel Industry “CBS Publishers &
Distributors, 2008
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Program Outcome
Outco Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9' 10 11 12 O1 O 2 O3
CO1 Fundamental
concepts of
industrial 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
Engineering and
productivity
CO2 Method study 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO3 Motion analysis 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO4 Work
measurement 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
and SAM
CO5 Ergonomics and
its application to 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
garment industry
Overall CO 1.2 2 3 3 2 1 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively
OTT353 BASICS OF TEXTILE MANUFACTURE LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about the basics of fibre forming, yarn production, fabric formation,
coloration of fabrics and garment manufacturing
UNIT I NATURAL FIBRES 9

Introduction: Definition of staple fibre, filament; Classification of natural and man-made fibres,
essential and desirable properties of fibres. Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cultivation of
cotton, production of silk (sericulture), wool and jute – physical and chemical structure of these fibres..
UNIT II REGENERATED AND SYNTHETIC FIBRES 9

Production sequence of regenerated and modified cellulosic fibres: viscose rayon, Acetate Rayon,
high wet modulus and high tenacity fibres; synthetic fibres – chemical structure, fibre forming
polymers, production principles.
UNIT III BASICS OF SPINNING 9

Spinning – principle of yarn formation, sequence of machines for yarn production with short staple
fibres and blends, principles of opening and cleaning machines; yarn numbering – calculations
UNIT IV BASICS OF WEAVING 9

Woven fabric – warp, weft, weaving, path of warp; looms – classification, handloom and its parts,
powerloom, automatic looms, shuttleless looms, special type of looms; preparatory machines for
weaving process and their objectives; basic weaving mechanism - primary, secondary and auxiliary
mechanisms,
UNIT V BASICS OF KNITTING AND NONWOVEN 9

Knitting – classification, principle, types of fabrics; nonwoven process –classification, principle, types
of fabrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students shall have the basic knowledge on
CO1: Classification of fibres and production of natural fibres
CO2: Regenerated and synthetic fibres
CO3: Yarn spinning
CO4: Weaving
CO5: Knitting and nonwoven
TEXTBOOKS
1. Mishra S. P. , “A Text Book of Fibre Science and Technology”, New Age Publishers, 2000,
ISBN: 8122412505
2. Marks R., and Robinson. T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1989, ISBN: 0 900739 258.
3. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN: 185573
333 1
REFERENCES:
1. Hornberer M., Eberle H., Kilgus R., Ring W. and Hermeling H., “Clothing Technology:
From Fibre to Fabric”, Europa LehrmittelVerlag, 2008, ISBN: 3808562250 / ISBN: 978-
3808562253.
2. Wynne A., “Motivate Series-Textiles”, Maxmillan Publications, London, 1997.
3. Carr H. and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell Science,
U.K., 1994, ISBN: 0632037482 / ISBN:13: 9780632037483.Klein W., “The Rieter
Manual of Spinning, Vol.1”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-
9523173-1-4 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-1-0.
4. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.2”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd.,
Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-2-2 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-2-7.
5. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1-3”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd.,
Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-3-0 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-3-4.
6. Talukdar. M.K., Sriramulu. P.K., and Ajgaonkar. D.B., “Weaving: Machines,
Mechanisms, Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-
85401-16-0.
7. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
8. Gohl E. P. G., “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers and distributors, 1987, ISBN
0582685958
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX:
Outco Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9' 10 11 12 O1 O 2 O3
CO1 Classification of - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
fibres and
production of
natural fibres
CO2 Regenerated and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
synthetic fibres
CO3 Yarn spinning - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5 Knitting and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
nonwoven
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
OPE351 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM REFINING AND PETROCHEMICALS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
• Gain knowledge about petroleum refining process and production of petrochemical
products.
UNIT I ORIGIN, FORMATION AND REFINING OF CRUDE OIL 9

Origin, Formation and Evaluation of Crude Oil. Testing of Petroleum Products. Refining of Petroleum -
Atmospheric and Vacuum Distillation.
UNIT II CRACKING 9
Cracking, Thermal Cracking, Vis-breaking, Catalytic Cracking (FCC), Hydro Cracking, Coking and Air
Blowing of Bitumen
UNIT III REFORMING AND HYDROTREATING 9

Catalytic Reforming of Petroleum Feed Stocks. Lube oil processing- Solvent Treatment Processes,
Dewaxing, Clay Treatment and Hydrofining. Treatment Techniques: Removal of Sulphur Compounds
in all Petroleum Fractions to improve performance.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO PETROCHEMICALS 9

Petrochemicals - Cracking of Naphtha and Feed stock gas for the production of Ethylene, Propylen e,
Isobutylene and Butadiene. Production of Acetylene from Methane, and Extraction of Aromatics.
UNIT V PRODUCTION OF PETROCHEMICALS 9

Production of Petrochemicals like Dimethyl Terephathalate(DMT), Ethylene Glycol, Synthetic
glycerine, Linear Alkyl Benzene (LAB), Acrylonitrile, Methyl Methacrylate (MMA), Vinyl Acetate
Monomer, Phthalic Anhydride, Maleic Anhydride, Phenol, Acetone, Methanol, Formaldehyde,
Acetaldehyde, Pentaerythritol and production of Carbon Black.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the classification, composition and testing methods of crude petroleum and its
products. Learn the mechanism of refining process.
CO2: Understand the insights of primary treatment processes to produce the precursors.
CO3: Study the secondary treatment processes cracking, vis-breaking and coking to produce more
petroleum products.
CO4: Appreciate the need of treatment techniques for the removal of sulphur and other impurities
from petroleum products.
CO5: Understand the societal impact of petrochemicals and learn their manufacturing processes.
CO6: Learn the importance of optimization of process parameters for the high yield of petroleum
products.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Nelson, W. L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, 4th Edition., McGraw Hill, New York,1985.
2. Wiseman. P., "Petrochemicals", UMIST Series in Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons,1986.
REFERENCES
1. Bhaskara Rao, B. K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and
IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Bhaskara Rao, B. K. “A Text on Petrochemicals”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers
CPE334 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
• understand and analyse the energy data of industries
• carryout energy accounting and balancing
• conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
• utilise the available resources in optimal ways
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy
Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Illumination.
UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets
UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value, Life
Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyze the energy data of industries.
CO1: Remember the knowledge for Basic combustion and furnace design and
selection of thermal and mechanical energy equipment.
CO2: Study the Importance of Stoichiometry relations, Theoretical air required for complete
combustion.
CO3: Skills on combustion thermodynamics and kinetics.
CO4: Apply calculation and design tube still heaters.
CO5: Studied different heat treatment furnace.
CO6: Practical and theoretical knowledge burner design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at
www.energymanagertraining.com. a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency
(BEE), a statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987
OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships between
material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so on
• To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
• Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and casting)
• To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
• To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products
manufactured by various processing techniques
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs. metals
and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular weight, viscosity
and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset processing. Additives for
plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light stabilizers, UV stabilizers, lubricants,
impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, stabilizers and plasticizers. Compounding:
plastic compounding techniques, plasticization, pelletization.
UNITII EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws, drive
mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow mechanism: process
variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt fracture, shark skin,
bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of films: blown and cast films.
Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw extruder and its applications.
Applications of extrusion and new developments.
UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9

Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle
mechanisms. Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected area -
Shot weight Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing - Interaction of moulding
process aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types. Reciprocating vs. plunger type
injection moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection moulding. Injection moulding vs. other
plastic processing techniques. State-of-the art injection moulding techniques - Introduction to trouble
shooting
UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9

Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of terms-
Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process cycle, Inter
relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure requirements.
Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of compression mould-
positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their correction- Finishing of
mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press capacity-Integral moulds and
auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot transfer, plunger transfer and screw
transfer moulding techniques, advantages over compression moulding
UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9

Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow moulding.
Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance. Thermoforming: principle,
vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting: working principle, types and
applications.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
• Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection, blow,
compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
• Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for the
same
• Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various plastic
processing techniques.
• Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product
REFERENCES
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad
Reinhold Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic
Processing Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS
Publishers and Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley
(1973).
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry Inc.,
Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).
OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals, Periodic
& Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals –Classification of
systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant& Time-invariant,Causal &
Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9

Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace transforms in
Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9
Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties of DTFT -
Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:Determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: Determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3:Characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4:Characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5:Compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002
REFERENCES:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and MATLAB”,
McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
g
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS Of ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with
discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital
integrated circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
• To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
• To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator
UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model – Analysis
of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain
and frequency response- High frequency analysis.
UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9
Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.
UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9
Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback Amplifiers
– positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and
Crystal oscillators.
UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9
Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power amplifier
using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th Edition,
2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 10th
Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 7 th
Edition, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition,
2010.
2. D.Schilling and C.Belove, "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989
3. Muhammad H.Rashid, "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.
4.
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at
the optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical Trends
- Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development Methodologies
and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of
Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and
Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability Matrix
and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to System
Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept generation
Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept Screening & Evaluation -
Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical, Electronics and Software
Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W
Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping -
Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification
and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence Management
– Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus Academia –
The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development processes -
Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical, Embedded and
Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property Rights and Confidentiality
– Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
• Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
• Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
• Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
• Work independently as well as in teams
• Manage a project from start to finish
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata
McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier],
Oxford, 2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and
Design", McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.
CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
• To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
• To know the developments in assistive technology
UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra aortic
balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle, prosthetic heart
valves, cardiac pacemaker.
UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis, portable
dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.
UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9

Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking techniques,
SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based hearing aids.
UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9

Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis, feedback
in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9
Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three
Volume Set, CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match
Project, Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition,
2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-
323-662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-
Blackwell April 2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg.
OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
• Determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
• Study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques
to solve them.
• Acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer programming
problems.
• Acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic programming
problems.
• Determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.
UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9
Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M Method –
Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .
UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and
bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.
UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation model –
Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of L.P.P by
dynamic programming .
UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
• Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a
linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for solving
linear programming problems.
• Analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
• Solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
• Conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
• Determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth Edition ,
New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India Ltd ,
Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s Outlines
– TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University Press,
New Delhi , 2012.
4. J.P.Singh and N.P.Singh , " Operations Research , Ane Books Pvt.L.td, New Delhi , 2014.
5. F.S.Hillier and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata McGraw Hill,
Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY LT P C
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
• To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
• To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.
UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.
UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9

Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.
UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers –
GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.
UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications : Divisibility
tests - Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.
UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
• Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
• The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial problems
related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by
the text
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics",
Pearson Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier
Publications , New Delhi , 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge
Publications, Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of
Numbers” , John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2 nd
Edition , 2006.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -
OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
• To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
• To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
• To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
• To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix
decomposition.
UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss elimination
method - Gauss Jordan method.
UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear independence
and dependence - Basis and dimension.
UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9

Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem– Matrix
representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear transformation –
Diagonalization.
UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9

Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.
UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9

Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition –
QR decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
1. Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
2. Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
3. Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
4. Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
5. Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th Edition,2019.
REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New Delhi, 8 th
Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New Delhi, 7th
Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Reprint,
2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi, 4th Edition,
2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and
their pro and cons for living organisms.
UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9

Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types of
microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.
UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9

Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation
methods, fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.
UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9

Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu,
Malaria, Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.
UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9

Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food Microbiology,
Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.
UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9

Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products –
Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Microbes and their types
2. Cultivation of microbes
3. Pathogens and control measures for safety
4. Microbes in different industry for economy.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi,
India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers,
1996.
OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse background in
life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of various biomolecules and
their metabolism.
UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects of
monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and polysaccharide
(Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.
UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9

Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction, Nomenclature and
classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.
UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to protein,
classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide bond–
Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein. Introduction to
lipoprotein, glycoprotein and nucleoprotein.Biological function of protein.
UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of DNA &
amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature· DNA double
helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.
UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9

Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related diseases.
Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of steroid hormones,
epinephrine, glucagons and insulin.Role of vitamins and hormones in metabolism; Hormonal
disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to know the
importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox W.H.Freeman
and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books & Allied (P)
Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
4. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y Doi.pp 693.
John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.
REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.
OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
• To understand the signalling mechanisms.
• Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate growth,
• division and development.
UNIT-I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.
UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9

Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi apparatus,
plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome, Nucleus and
nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.
UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes, asymmetrical
organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s law, simple diffusion,
passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary, group translocation, transport
ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals. Transportmechanism- mobile carriers and
pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation, endocytosis, exocytosis, cell respiration.
UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation of cell
cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell junction, cell
cycle checkpoints.
UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional DNA
replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA synthesis:
Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic code- Steps in
translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
• Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
• Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2018
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J.
Molecular Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.
OPEN ELECTIVE IV
OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
• Understand the essentials of project writing.
• Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
• Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
• Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
• Learn the structure of a technical and project report.
UNITI 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech, Concord,
Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs. General Writing.
UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience – Plagiarism –
Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.
UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement – Funding
Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the research question -
Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the feasibility – Theoretical
Framework.
UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of Data
Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations -
Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.
UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format – Font –
Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally – Techniques.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
• Write effective project reports.
• Use statistical tools with confidence.
• Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
• Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
• Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
• Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
REFERENCES:
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition, Prentice
Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project Finance
(2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016) Penwell
Publishers.
OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9

System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of linear
equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen value problems:
Given's method - Householder's method.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for continuous
data (upto 3rd degree).
UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9

Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -Corrector
Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value problems -
Orthogonal Collocation method.
UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9

Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes -
Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in polar
coordinates : Finite difference schemes .
UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average approximation
- Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations - Method of characteristics -
Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit scheme – Stability of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications,
Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers, 2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and Science",
Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th Edition,
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random
variables with applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
• To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in
communication networks.
• To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time
scenario.
• To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
• To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.
UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.
UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions -
Stationary Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.
UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.
UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density –
Cross spectral density – Properties.
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs –
Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and
apply in engineering applications.
• Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
• Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
• Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
• Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian
Reprint, Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis",
Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to
Signal Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd., Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
• To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
• To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop probabilistic
models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
• To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
• To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up new
avenues for research.
UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9
Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.
UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.
UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series
queues – Open Jackson networks.
UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9

Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution –
Time - dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.
UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system with
repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
• Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
• Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time
in a probabilistic manner.
• Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.
• Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and
availability analyses by using theoretical approach.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam,
2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,1983.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
• To understand the Production process and planning.
• To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business
owners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9

Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions –
Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production
and operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production
/operations management - production as an organisational function, decision making in
production Operations research
UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production - Functions
and significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity
measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing and service
industry
UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9

Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and
techniques – Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of
production process systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control
Functions – Planning phase- Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning
UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance –
Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant
Layout: meaning – characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design -
Optimisation and Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)-
REL (Relationship) Chart – Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting
methods.
UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control systems
and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality Management:
Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring quality - Control
Chart (X , R , p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement (Kaizen) - Quality
awards - Supply Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma approach and Zero
Defect Manufacturing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO1: To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for
business owners.
CO2: To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
CO3: To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by
entrepreneurs in Industries.
CO4: To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO5: To comprehend the techniques of controlling, Production and Operations in industries.
REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan
India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.
OCE354 BASICS OF INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
• To introduce the interdisciplinary approach of water management.
• To develop knowledge base and capacity building on IWRM.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IWRM 9

Facts about water - Definition – Key challenges - Paradigm shift - Water management
Principles - Social equity - Ecological sustainability – Economic efficiency - SDGs - World
Water Forums.
UNIT II WATER USE SECTORS: IMPACTS AND SOLUTION 9

Water users: People, Agriculture, ecosystem and others - Impacts of the water use sectors
on water resources - Securing water for people, food production, ecosystems and other uses
- IWRM relevance in water resources management.
UNIT III WATER ECONOMICS 9

Economic characteristics of water good and services – Economic instruments – Private
sector involvement in water resources management - PPP experiences through case studies.
UNIT IV RECENT TREANDS IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9

River basin management - Ecosystem Regeneration – 5 Rs - WASH - Sustainable livelihood
- Water management in the context of climate change.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF IWRM 9

Barriers to implementing IWRM - Policy and legal framework - Bureaucratic reforms and
inclusive development - Institutional Transformation - Capacity building - Case studies on
conceptual framework of IWRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply appropriate management
techniques towards managing the water resources.
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated
ways of water management.
CO2 Discuss on the different water uses; how it is impacted and ways to tackle these
impacts.
CO3 Explain the economic aspects of water and choose the best economic option among
the alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP through case studies.
CO4 Illustrate the recent trends in water management.
CO5 Understand the implementation hitches and the institutional frameworks.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and
policy. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2003.
2. Mollinga P. et al. “Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia
Volume I, Sage Publications, 2006.
REFERENCES
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Background Papers No: 1, 4 and 7, Stockholm,
Sweden. 2002.
2. IWRM Guidelines at River Basin Level (UNESCO, 2008).
3. Tutorial on Basic Principles of Integrated Water Resources Management ,CAP-NET.
http://www.pacificwater.org/userfiles/file/IWRM/Toolboxes/introduction%20to%20iwrm/Tu
torial_text.pdf
4. Pramod R. Bhave, 2011, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers.
5. The 17 Goals, United Nations, https://sdgs.un.org/goals.
OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques –
Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.
UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9

Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for
dealing with missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.
UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9

Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function –
Validation of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.
UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation
models, Longitudinal studies.
UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate
techniques to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
• Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the
results correctly with detailed and useful information.
• Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
• Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including
thoughtful and convincing details.
• Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘
REFERENCES :
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda S.Fidell, Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson,
2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean W.Wichern, Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002
OCE353 LEAN CONCEPTS, TOOLS AND PRACTICES LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To impart knowledge about the basics of lean principles, tools and techniques, and
implementation in the construction industry.
Introduction and overview of the construction project management - Review of Project
Management & Productivity Measurement Systems - Productivity in Construction - Daily
Progress Report-The state of the industry with respect to its management practices -
construction project phases - The problems with current construction management techniques.
UNIT II LEAN MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to lean management - Toyota’s management principle-Evolution of lean in
construction industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in
construction - Target value design - Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in
construction industry - Waste Elimination.
UNIT III CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact –
Traditional construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction
and workflow reliability – Work structuring – Production control.
UNIT IV LEAN TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull based
production – Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly
planning meeting- Daily Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in
time.
UNIT V LEAN IMPLEMENTATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9

Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology - Lean in
design - Design Structure - BIM (Building Information Modelling) - IPD (Integrated Project
Delivery) – Sustainability through lean construction approach.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Explains the contemporary management techniques and the issues in present scenario.
CO2 Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from manufacturing
industry to construction industry.
CO3 Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and
techniques and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4 Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5 Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.
REFERENCES:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability
agenda, CIRIA, 2013.
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way,
Springer, 2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P.,Implementing lean in
construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and
techniques, 2002.
5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and
Assessment of Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005.
OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM), and its
business opportunities.
To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting processes.
To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain - ASTM/ISO 52900
Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats: STL, AMF Applications: Building
Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing, Automobile, Aerospace, Healthcare.
Business Opportunities in AM.
UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9
Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and bottom
up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) - Process -
Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.
UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9
Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials -
Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations - Applications.
UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9
Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications. Directed Energy
Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -Materials -Benefits -
Applications.
UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9
Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes, Aerosol DW
- Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and its
applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for Prototyping
and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-56990-582-1.
REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN :9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United
States ,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.
CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
2 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
3 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
4
development
To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model
UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note), Component
material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of monitoring of NPD applying
Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of Materials), Engg. BOM &
Manufacturing BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in industries like SAP, MS Dynamics,
Oracle ERP Cloud – QFD.
UNIT – II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9

Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various
manufacturing process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5 Axis,
), Fabrications, Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical & Chemical properties
and their test report preparation and submission. Fundamentals of DFMEA & PFMEA, Fundamentals of
FEA, Bend Analysis, Hot Distortion, Metal and Material Flow, Fill and Solidification analysis.
UNIT – III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross Function Team)
discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection for tool making,
Machining – Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting tool selection – Various
Inspection methods – Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric Optical Measuring), Lay out
marking and Cut section analysis. Tool Design and Detail drawings preparation, release of details to
machine shop and CAM programing. Tool assembly and shop floor trials. Initial sample submission with
PPAP documents.
UNIT – IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal Soundness
proving through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement with customer for
testing frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis, validating samples with
simulation results, Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.
UNIT – V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9
Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP,
Importance of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in shop floor.
Prototyping & RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin models, Sand cores
for foundries; Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model –
Advantages & Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) – Basics, Application and its advantages
in NPD (to reduce development lead time, time to Market, Improve productivity and product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product
development
2. Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing process.
3. Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
4. Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
5. Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Product Development – Sten Jonsson
2. Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger
REFERENCES:
1. Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
2. Change by Design
3. Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
4. Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
5. Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
• Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
• Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
• Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
• Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
• Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices
UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology and
Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile and
Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow, wireframes,
best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives
UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT 9
SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development - understanding
Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API - Introduction to Cloud
services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to cloud - Embedding ML
models to Apps - Deploying application.
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept generation -
Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D Modeling Tools - Part
creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics - Dimensioning & Tolerancing
UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical Prototyping;
3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive manufacturing
UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with simulation
tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
● Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
● Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
● Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology
TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson,3rd edition(2014)
REFERENCES
1. https://www.adobe.com/products/xd/learn/get-star ted.html
2. https://developer.android.com/guide
3. https://help.autodesk.com/view/fusion360/ENU/courses/
4. https://help.prusa3d.com/en/categor y/prusaslicer_204
MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
• Learn about the precision machine tools
• Learn about the macro and micro components.
• Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
• Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
• Learn metrology for micro system
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9

Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc. for
medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical, electrical
properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force,
acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems.
UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro engines,
micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9

Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.
UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.
UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
• Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
• Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
• Apply suitable machining process
• Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other
instruments.
• Apply metrology for micro system
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and Development.
Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New Delhi,
2005
AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to make the students
• To understand the working and characteristics of different types of batteries
and their management .
UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9
Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging.
Characteristics- SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing.
Other Batteries-NCM and NCA Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.
UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9

Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation Model.Peak
power – definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic
Internal Resistance. Cloud based and Local Smart charging.
UNITIII BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural
Network Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State
space Models- Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks
UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation Methods-
Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks, Neuro-fuzzy
forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.
UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1
Battery Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-Flex
Ray- CANedge1 package.ARBIN Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling software and
Model-Based Design.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
2. Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
3. Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
4. Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
5. Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion
batteriesin Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery
Packs” ARTECH House, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-
whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet
OAU352 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of
sensor and actuators used in automotive vehicles.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9

Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and
standards-Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error- Probable
error-Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-Classification. Static
characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and Second order transducers-
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.
UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9

Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT
UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9

Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-Humidity
Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.
UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9

Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type
ratings for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz.
Solenoid, relay, stepper motor etc.
UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9

Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable
displacement temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable
displacement type air conditioning system.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
2. Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and flow.
3. Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
4. Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
5. Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin DhaneshN.Manik
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components,
Networking and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.
REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective," 7th
Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.
OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
Interpret costing concepts with project execution
Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential
cost, Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’
UNIT – II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of
project execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical
and nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances
and documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site: Data required with
significance, Project contracts
UNIT – III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning:
mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction
between Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit
Analysis, Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis, Target costing,
Life Cycle Costing
UNIT – IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.
UNIT – V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning
Curve Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.
REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler
publisher, 1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd,
2007.
OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES LT PC

3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
• To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
• To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration design.
• To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
• To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle
UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9

Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values – Mission
design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on launch vehicle
integrity.
UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9

Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for stages
and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.
UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9

Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems – Engine
Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and Engine
Optimization.
UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9

TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles – Testing –
Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume problems in
space environment
UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9

Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in the
finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection system -
separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
• Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
• interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
• Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-entry.
• Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic vehicle
design.
OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
• To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
• To impart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
• To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
• To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
• To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business strategies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9

Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of
Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's
TheoryXandTheoryY-HertzbergTwoFactorTheoryofMotivation-
LeadershipStyles,Socialresponsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures:
Basic concepts related to Organisation -Departmentation and Decentralisation.
UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass
Production),Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement -
BusinessProcessReengineering(BPR)-
StatisticalQualityControl:controlchartsforVariablesandAttributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance
Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores
Management and Store Records - JIT System,Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing,
Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.
UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9
Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection, Training and
Development, Wage and Salary Administration, Promotion,Transfer,Performance Appraisal,
Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –Capability
Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.
UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path Method
(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time, Project Cost
Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).
UNITV STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES 9

Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning
Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy
Formulation and Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced
Score Cardas Contemporary Business Strategies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:Plan an organizational structure for a given context in the organization to carryout production
operations through Work-study.
CO2:Survey the markets,customersandcompetitionbetterandpricethegivenproductsappropriatey
CO3:En sure quality for a given product or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5
TEXT BOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press,2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman,Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,New Delhi,2004.
3. ThomasN.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management Principles and Guidelines, Biztantra,
2007.
4. P.VijayKumar, N.Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.
REFERENCES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch, R.Guptaand William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic
Management Science, McGraw Hill,2012.
4. SamuelC.Certo: Modern Management, 2012.
OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L TPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
• To apply the concept of product planning,
• To analyze the production scheduling,
• To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
• To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect.
Profit consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-
Economics of a new design.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of
work measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard
data - Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9
Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine
capacity, balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-
Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting
and expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production
planning systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II)
and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for
manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S. Chand
and Company, 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,
Khanna Publishers, 1990
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university
press,2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE, 2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition,
Excel books 2007
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8
OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in
creating and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
• Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and
Operations Management (both manufacturing and service).
• Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas
of a firm.
• Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations
problems.
• Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation
processes, differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions,
challenges, current priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit ,
framework; Supply Chain Management
UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9

Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative and Quantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing
capacity alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II
and ERP. Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility
Layout – Principles, Types, Planning tools and techniques.
UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9
Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental
issues. Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.
UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9
Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control.
Purchasing – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value
Analysis. Stores Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory –
COURSE OBJECTIVES, Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.
UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers –
nature,importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling –
Johnson‟sAlgorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in
enabling and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business
environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for
Production and Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements
and developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano,
Operations andSupply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western
CengageLearning, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition,
2008.
5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,
Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3
OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in
work health and safety.
2. Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health
and safety
3. Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne
gases, vapours and particulates
4. Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
5. Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Comm on
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.
UNIT II MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9

Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method, Personal
hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.
UNIT III OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9

Element of training cycle, Assessment of needs.Techniques of training, design and development
of training programs.Training methods and strategies types of training.Evaluation and review of
training programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training,
Stress and Safety, Exposure Limit .
UNIT IV OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9
Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA,
Process Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA
Standards, Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of
Industrial safety, role of safety department,
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9

Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of
radiation intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive
waste, Control of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on
the auditory system and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries,
Effect of different gases and particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health,
Vibration: effects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing
systems and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations with
respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .
REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma
Jourdan publication
2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council of
India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth-
Heinemann Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -
OSF353 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• Teach the principles of safety applicable to the design, and operation of chemical process
plants.
• Ensure that potential hazards are identified and mitigation measures are in place to
prevent unwanted release of energy.
• Learn about the hazardous chemicals into locations that could expose employees and
others to serious harm.
• Focuses on preventing incidents and accidents during large scale manufacturing of
chemicals and pharmaceuticals.
• Ensure that the general design of the plant is capable of complying with the dose limits in
force and with the radioactive releases.
UNIT I SAFETY IN THE STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CHEMICALS AND GASES 9

Types of storage-general considerations for storage layouts- atmospheric venting, pressure
and temperature relief - relief valve sizing calculations - storage and handling of hazardous
chemicals and industrial gases, safe disposal methods, reaction with other chemicals,
hazards during transportation - pipe line transport - safety in chemical laboratories.
UNIT II CHEMICAL REACTION HAZARDS 9

Hazardous inorganic and organic reactions and processes, Reactivity as a process
hazard, Detonations, Deflagrations, and Runaways, Assessment and Testing strategies,
Self - heating hazards of solids, Explosive potential of chemicals, Structural groups and
instability of chemicals, Thermochemical screening,
UNIT III SAFETY IN THE DESIGN OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Design principles -Process design development -types of designs, feasibility survey,
preliminary design, Flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagram, batch versus
continuous operation, factors in equipment scale up and design, equipment specifications -
reliability and safety in designing - inherent safety - engineered safety - safety during startup
and shutdown - non destructive testing methods - pressure and leak testing - emergency
safety devices - scrubbers and flares- new concepts in safety design and operation- Pressure
vessel testing standards- Inspection techniques for boilers and reaction vessels.
UNIT IV SAFETY IN THE OPERATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Properties of chemicals - Material Safety Data Sheets - the various properties and formats
used - methods available for property determination. Operational activities and hazards -
standards operating procedures - safe operation of pumps, compressors, heaters, column,
reactors, pressure vessels, storage vessels, piping systems - effects of pressure,
temperature, Flow rate and humidity on operations - corrosion and control measures-
condition monitoring - control valves - safety valves - pressure reducing valves, drains,
bypass valves, inert gases. Chemical splashes, eye irrigation and automatic showers.
UNIT V SAFETY AND ANALYSIS 9

Safety vs reliability- quantification of basic events, system safety quantification, Human error
analysis, Accident investigation and analysis, OSHAS 18001 and OSHMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Differentiate between inherent safety and engineered safety and recognize the
importance of safety in the design of chemical process plants.
CO2 Develop thorough knowledge about safety in the operation of chemical plants.
CO3Apply the principles of safety in the storage and handling of gases.
CO4Identify the conditions that lead to reaction hazards and adopt measures to prevent them.
CO5Develop thorough knowledge about
TEXT BOOK
1 David A Crowl& Joseph F Louvar,”Chemical Process safety”, Pearson publication, 3rd
Edition,2014
2 Maurice Jones .A,”Fire Protection Systems,2nd edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers,2015
REFERENCES:
1. Ralph King and Ron Hirst,”King´s safety in the process industries”, Arnold, London, 1998.
2. Industrial Environment and its Evolution and Control, NIOSH Publication, 1973.
3. National Safety Council,” Accident prevention manual for industrial operations”. Chicago,
1982.
4. Lewis, Richard. J., Sr,“Sax´s dangerous properties of materials”. (Ninth edition). Van
Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1996.
5. Roy E Sanders, ”Chemical Process Safety”,3rd Edition, Gulf professional publishing, 2006

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - -
2 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 -
3 - 3 1 - - - 2 - - 1 - - - -
4 - 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 2
5 - 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
AVg. 2 2.5 3 1.5 - 1 - 1.5 1 - 1 2 2 2
OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics and
• magnetic applications
• Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic materials.
• Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
• Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
• Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.
UNIT I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength,
breakdown voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric
conductivity in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of
ferromagnetic materials in static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic
materials, piezoelectric materials, pyroelectric materials.
UNIT II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials,
special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent
magnets, ageing of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high temperature
superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments on fabrication
and engineering applications.
UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded
conductors, bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon
materials, thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of
moisture on insulation.
UNIT V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9

Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser principles -
He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials - LCD materials
- photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and materials - electro
optic modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
• Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
• Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
• Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
• Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and
Francis, 2nd illustrated edition, 2017.
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications, 2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp;
Sons, 2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,Singapore,
(2006).
PO1 PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO11 PO12
0 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2
OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to
understand different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
2. Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
3. Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
4. Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise the
nanomaterials
5. Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.
UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their
mechanical, electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.
UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 9

Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity,
grain growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.
UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and X-
ray absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their
application to nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture, stress
analysis
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings; applications in
electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
2. Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
3. Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
4. Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
5. Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and Potential
Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.
REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003
2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific
Publishers 2004
3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3
OMR352 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS LT PC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To knowledge on fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
2. To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic actuators and control components
3. To understand the basics in hydraulic circuits and systems
4. To obtain the knowledge in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
5. To apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting
UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9

Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of
fluids - Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of
flow - Friction loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power : Pumping
Theory – Pump Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Performance, Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable displacement pumps
– Problems.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control
valves – Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications –
Accessories : Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols –
Problems.
UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9

Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double
Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-Safe,
Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical hydraulic servo
systems.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9

Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit –
Cascade method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems,
Introduction to fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9

Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and
Pneumatic systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface
grinding, Press and Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place
applications and tool handling in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and
Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO 1: Analyze the methods in fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
CO 2: Recognize the concepts in hydraulic actuators and control components
CO 3: Obtain the knowledge in basics of hydraulic circuits and systems
CO 4: Know about the basics concept in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
CO 5: Apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting hydraulic and pneumatics
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
Average
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. James A. Sullivan, “Fluid Power Theory and Applications”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall,
1997.
REFERENCES
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”. Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McG Raw
Hill, 2001.
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGRaw Hill,
2007.
4. Dudley, A. Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
5. Srinivasan. R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
6. Joshi.P, Pneumatic Control”, Wiley India, 2008.
7. Jagadeesha T, “Pneumatics Concepts, Design and Applications “, Universities Press, 2015.
OMR353 SENSORS LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types, calibration
techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
2. To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
3. To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and
characteristics of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
4. To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of
optical, pressure, temperature and other sensors.
5. To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data
acquisition system.
UNIT I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of Sensors
– Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and Digital Signals,
PWM and PPM.
UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical,
Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range
Sensors - Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS - RF
Beacons.
UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9
Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement –
Force and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage, Limitation,
and Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading Sensors –
Compass, Gyroscope and Inclinometers.
UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9
Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC, Thermistor,
RTD, Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors - Smart
Sensors.
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9

Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement -
DC and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers – Filter
and Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and direction
measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0. 0. 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average 8 8
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.
ORA352 CONCEPTS IN MOBILE ROBOTS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
2. To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
3. To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
4. To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
5. To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and
intelligence.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 9
Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots
– Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues
– Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles
UNIT – II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot
Constraints – Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees
of Freedom – Path and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots
UNIT – III PERCEPTION 9
Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor
Sensors – Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed
Sensors – Camera - Visual Appearance based Feature Extraction.
UNIT – IV LOCALIZATION 9
Localization Based Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Map Representation -
Continuous Representations - Decomposition Strategies - Probabilistic Map-Based
Localization - Landmark-Based Navigation - Globally Unique Localization - Positioning
Beacon Systems - Route-Based Localization - Autonomous Map Building - Simultaneous
Localization and Mapping (SLAM).
UNIT – V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9

Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Control Localization - Techniques for Decomposition -
Case Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2: Create the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO3:Analyse the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence for
desired applications.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roland Siegwart and IllahR.Nourbakish, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015.
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.
5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea,
Air, and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.
CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics of drone concepts
2. To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
3. To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
4. To know about the various applications of drone
5. To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of drones
based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone business
through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and employability
UNIT II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9

Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the parts -
Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of autonomy-
Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -Install program on
computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi connection.
UNIT III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment-
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity -Removable
storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications
UNIT IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering mail,
parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines and power
distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing
UNIT V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9

The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO4: Createthe programs for various drones
CO-PO MAPPING:
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc,
2016
REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and
ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for
Security and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.
OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and
Information Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS –
Hardware, Software, Data, People, Methods – Proprietary and open source
Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute data- types of attributes – scales/ levels
of measurements.
UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9

Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models
- conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures
– Raster Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and
GRID data models.
UNIT III DATAINPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data
Input –Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation –
Topology - Adjacency, connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non
topological file formats - Attribute Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data
Integration
UNIT IV DATAQUALITY AND STANDARDS 9

Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy,
temporal accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –
Interoperability - OGC - Spatial Data Infrastructure
UNIT V DATAMANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9

Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster
Conversion - Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise
Vs. Desktop GIS- distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw
Hill Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction
Geographical Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems, Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006.
CO – PO – PSO MAPPING: GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM
Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
Engineering problems and 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
Design solutions 3 3 3 3 3
OAI352 AGRICULTURE ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES
• To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and
principles
• To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing
management, Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIAN CONTEXT 9

Entrepreneur Development(ED): Concept of entrepreneur and entrepreneurship assessing
overall business environment in Indian economy- Entrepreneurial and managerial
characteristics- Entrepreneurship development programmers (EDP)-Generation incubation
and commercialization of ideas and innovations- Motivation and entrepreneurship
development- Globalization and the emerging business entrepreneurial environment.
UNIT II AGRIPRNEURSHIP IN GLOBAL ARENA: LEGAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Importance of agribusiness in Indian economy - International trade-WTO agreements-
Provisions related to agreements in agricultural and food commodities - Agreements on
Agriculture (AOA)- Domestic supply, market access, export subsidies agreements on sanitary
and phyto-sanitary (SPS) measures, Trade related intellectual property rights (TRIPS).
UNIT III ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT: FINANCIAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Entrepreneurship - Essence of managerial Knowledge -Management functions- Planning-
organizing-Directing-Motivation-ordering-leading-supervision- communication and control-
Understanding Financial Aspects of Business - Importance of financial statements-liquidity
ratios-leverage ratios, coverage ratios-turnover ratios-Profitability ratios. Agro-based
industries-Project-Project cycle-Project appraisal and evaluation techniques-undiscounted
measures-Payback period-proceeds per rupee of outlay, Discounted measures-Net Present
Value (NPV)-Benefit-Cost Ratio(BCR)-Internal Rate of Return(IRR)-Net benefit investment
ratio(N/K ratio)-sensitivity analysis.
UNIT IV ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES: ECONOMIC GROWTH

PERSPECTIVE 9
Managing an enterprise: Importance of planning, budgeting, monitoring evaluation and follow-
up managing competition. Role of ED in economic development of a country- Overview of
Indian social, political system and their implications for decision making by individual
entrepreneurs- Economic system and its implication for decision making by individual
entrepreneurs.
UNITV ENTREPRENEURIAL PROMOTION MEASURES AND GOVERNMENT

SUPPORT 9
Social responsibility of business. Morals and ethics in enterprise management- SWOT
analysis- Government schemes and incentives for promotions of entrepreneurship.
Government policy on small and medium enterprises (SMEs)/SSIs/MSME sectors- Venture
capital (VC), contract framing (CF) and Joint Venture (JV), public-private
partnerships (PPP) - overview of agricultural engineering industry, characteristics of Indian
farm machinery industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Judge about agricultural finance, banking and cooperation
2. Evaluate basic concepts, principles and functions of financial management
3. Improve the skills on basic banking and insurance schemes available to customers
4. Analyze various financial data for efficient farm management
5. Identify the financial institutions
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph L. Massie, 1995, “Essentials of Management”, prentice Hall of India Pvt limited,
New Delhi
2. Khanka S, 1999, Entrepreneurial Development, S, Chand and Co, New Delhi
3. Mohanty S K, 2007, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. Harih S B, Conner U J and Schwab G D, 1981, Management of the Farm Business,
Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
2. Omri Ralins, N.1980, Introduction to Agricultural: Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
3. Gittenger Price, 1989, Economic Analysis of Agricultural project, John Hopkins
University, Press, London.
4. Thomas W Zimmer and Norman M Scarborough, 1996, Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey.
5. Mar J Dollinger, 1999, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Prentice –Hall, Upper
Saddal Rover, New Jersey.
CO-PO MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO CO CO4 CO Overall

2 3 5 correlation of
COs with POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 1 1 2 1 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 2 1 1 1
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 1 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 1 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 1 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 1 1
approach in agriculture with proper
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 1 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 1 2 1
linkage.
OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation techniques.
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of
Classification and their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters;
Study of important families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9

Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of
Taxon, Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom,
Invertebrates, Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.
UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9

Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species,
Criteria for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and
Protozoa); Criteria for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical
Methods of Microbial Diversity Analysis
UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9
Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List;
Factors affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity,
Dispersal, Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity;
Sustainable Utilization of Bioresources; National Movements and International
Convention/Treaties on Biodiversity.
UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9

In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive
breeding, Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of
Keystone Species, Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct
Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany &
Embryology. S. Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A.
(2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine L.Case,
13th Edition 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVES
• To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
• To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
• To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
• To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain
• To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model
UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9
Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control
theory –Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations
– Block diagram reduction–Signal flow graphs.
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I
and II order system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots –
Determination of Transfer Function from Bode plot.
UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist
stability criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist &
Bode – Closed loop frequency response.
UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear &
continuous time systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability &
observability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw
Hill Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New
Age International, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson
Education, 2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996
USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control
System AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited,
2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and S.Janardhanan, Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First
Impression2010.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3
OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
2. To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
3. Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
4. To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
5. To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial
Automation system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition
(SCADA). Industrial bus systems : Modbus & Profibus
UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9

Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC,
power MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.
UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement
and control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process
related interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data
transfer techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data
acquisition system, Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output
modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication
and networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial
automation, Application of PLC to process control industries.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory
Computer Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages
of DCS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential
Function Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system
(L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied
automation Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and
Logic Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies,2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India,8th
Edition, 2006.
3. E.A.Parr, Newnes ,NewDelhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and
Applications”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill,
New York, 2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New
Delhi, 2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”,
CeneageLearning, 3rd Edition,2005.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105062/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
4. https://realpars.com/what-is-industrial-automation/
5. https://automationforum.co/what-is-industrial-automation-2/
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 0 3
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources and
energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis, energy
alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability. Prospects of
Renewable energy sources
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and
nuclear power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion
processes, fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water
heating, solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal
power generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of
windmills, types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power generation,
wind power in India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal
energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10
Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,
combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell,
phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer
electrolyte fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like
thermal energy storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat
exchangers, distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in
chemical plants, energy conservation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering
CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate
based
on local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical
understanding of energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi,
1981.
Course articulation matrix
Course Program Outcomes
Outcomes Statements PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Students will be able 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
to describe the
fundamentals and
main characteristics of
renewable energy
sources and their
differences compared
to fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the
various fields of
energy engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and
choose the most
appropriate based on
local conditions.
CO4 Explain the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
technological basis for
harnessing renewable
energy sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current
developments and
emerging trends within
the field of renewable
energy technologies
and to develop in-
depth technical
understanding of
energy problems at an
advanced level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial
(High) respectively
OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to structure,
chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.
UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band and
Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular beams,
Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational
spectroscopy
UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT

SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions of
atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption isotherms,
Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods
UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9

Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers, Electrified
interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical processes, Gratzel
cells
UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9

Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis,
Overview of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch and
Automotive catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface
functionalization and clusters in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate
oscillations and spatiotemporal pattern formation
UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9

Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth
modes, Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques,
Catalytic growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods and its
application in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and chemistry
behind surface phenomena
TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.
REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.
OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
• Acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
• Make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment
UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical
and electromagnetic properties.
UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate
curves, calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers; tray,
vacuum, osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave, IR, heat
pump and freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and foammat dryers
UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of ground
material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food, Rittinger’s,
Kick’s and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction equipment: Principal
types, crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and impactors, attrition mills,
buhr mill, tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting
machines (slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)
UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of mixing,
theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers for lo.w-
or medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid contacting
devices, other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry powders and
particulate solids.
UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate
of filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-
pressure filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press,
rotary filters, centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General
considerations, materials for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration,
concentration, polarization, processing variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-
filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis, mode of operation, and applications; Membrane
separation methods, demineralization by electro-dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-
evaporation and osmotic dehydration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of food
materials
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical properties
to develop new technologies for processing and preservation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food
Science & Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie John
Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th Ed.
Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food
Processing Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's Chemical
Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.
OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the
industry
and food service establishments
• To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
• To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
• To ensure processed food meets global standards
UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments,
Food Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common
adulterants), Food Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling.
Sanitation in warehousing, storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging
materials. Control of rats, rodents, mice, birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and
Disinfection, ISO 22000 – Importance and Implementation
UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial
Quality control. Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other
utilities.
UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and
processing materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food
inspection and Food Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response
and exposure response modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance
system to monitor food safety, risk communication
UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-
security in Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health
Organization (OIE), International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)
UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National
Codex contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions,
Shadow Committees etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the
industry and food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker
Inc., New York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons
Publication, 2003
OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical
nature and methods of extraction.
• To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6
Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition,
classification, list of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and
microbes in food, plants, animals and microbes.
UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11

Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans,
lycopene, chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as
lycopene, isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing
nutraceuticals - stability, analytical and labelling issues.
UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different
in vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the
antioxidant activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising
phytochemical release by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during
technological treatments, new food grade peptidases from plant sources.
UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11
The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3
fatty acid and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder,
Cancer, CVD, Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic,
prebiotic and synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role
and use in obesity and nervous system disorders.
UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”, 2nd
Edition, CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC, Publications.
2006
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd (United
Kingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /
Elsevier, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor),
Fereidoon Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis,
2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson
(Author), Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood
head Publ., 2000
5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2003.
COURSE OUTCOME - NUTRACEUTICALS

CO 1 Acquire knowledge about the nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO 2 Acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes
CO 3 Attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical
components and formulation considerations of functional foods.
CO 4 Distinguish the various in vitro and in vivo assessment of antioxidant activity of
compounds from plant sources.
CO 5 Gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals
in the prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO 6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national
and international level.
CO – PO MAPPING
NUTRACEUTICALS
COURSE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
OUTCOM 5
E
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1
OTT354 BASICS OF DYEING AND PRINTING LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
• To enable the students to learn about the basics of Pretreatment, dyeing, printing and
machinery in textile processing.
Impurities present in different fibres, Inspection of grey goods and lot preparation. Shearing,
UNIT II PRE TREATMENT 9

Desizing-Objective of Desizing- types of Desizing- Objective of Scouring- Mechanism of
Scouring– Degumming of Silk, Scouring of wool - Bio Scouring. Bleaching -Objective of
Bleaching: Bleaching mechanism of Hydrogen Peroxide, Hypo chlorites. Objective of
Mercerizing - Physical and Chemical changes of Mercerizing.
UNIT III DYEING 9

Dye - Affinity, Substantively, Reactivity, Exhaustion and Fixation. Classification of dyes. Direct
dyes: General properties, principles and method of application on cellulosic materials. Reactive
dyes – principles and method of application on cellulosic materials hot brand, cold brand.
UNIT IV PRINTING 9
Definition of printing – Difference between printing and dying- Classification thickeners –
Requirements to be good thickener, printing paste Preparation - different styles of printing.
UNIT V MACHINERIES 9
Fabric Processing - winch, jigger and soft flow machines. Beam dyeing machines: Printing -flat
bed screen - Rotary screen. Thermo transfer printing machinery. Garment dyeing machines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1: Basics of grey fabric
CO2: Basics of pre treatment
CO3: Concept of Dyeing
CO4: Concept of Printing
CO5: Machinery in processing industry
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Trotman, E.R., Textile Scouring and Bleaching, Charless Griffins, Com. Ltd.,
London 1990.
2. Shenai V.A. “Technology of Textile Processing Vol. IV” 1998, Sevak Publications,
Mumbai.
REFERENCES:
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles
Griffin & Co. Ltd., U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
2. Dr. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Wood head publishing India, 2018
3. Mathews Kolanjikombil., ”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and
Knitted fabrics”, Wood head publishing India , 2021
4. Bleaching & Mercerizing – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monograph series
5. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Wood
head Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3.
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX:

Outco Stateme PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes nt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Classific - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ation of
fibres
and
CO1
producti
on of
natural
fibres
Regener - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ated and
CO2
synthetic
fibres
Yarn - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO3
spinning
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
Knitting - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and
CO5
nonwove
n
Overa - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ll CO
FT 3201 FIBRE SCIENCE LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To enable the students to learn about the types of fibre and its properties
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE FIBRES 9

Definition of various forms of textile fibres - staple fibre, filament, bicomponent fibres.
Classification of Natural and Man-made fibres, essential and desirable properties of Fibres.
Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cotton, Silk, Wool -Physical and chemical structure
of the above fibres.
UNIT II REGENERATED FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Regenerated Cellulosic fibres: Viscose Rayon, Acetate rayon – High wet
modulus fibres: Modal and Lyocel ,Tencel
UNIT III SYNTHEITC FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Synthetic Fibers: polymer-Polyester, Nylon, Acrylic and polypropylene.
Mineral fibres: fibre glass ,carbon .Introduction to spin finishes and texturization
UNIT IV SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses of high tenacity and high modulus fibres, high temperature and flame
retardant fibres, Chemical resistant fibres
UNIT V FUNCTIONAL SPECIALITY FIBRES 9
Properties and end uses : Fibres for medical application – Biodegradable fibres based on PLA
,Super absorbent fibres elastomeric fibres, ultra-fine fibres, electrospun nano fibres, metallic
fibres – Gold and Silver coated.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
• Understand the process sequence of various fibres
• Understand the properties of various fibres
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
2. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU | ISBN-13:
3. Mukhopadhyay S. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN:
1870812379
REFERENCES:
1. Meredith R., “Mechanical Properties of Textile Fibres”, North Holland, Amsterdam, 1986,
ISBN: 1114790699, ISBN-13: 9781114790698
2. Hearle J. W. S., Lomas B., and Cooke W. D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to
Textiles”, The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN: 1855733196.
3. Raheel M. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
4. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”, Textile
Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN: 1870812115
5. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties: Fundamentals of Structures and
Mechanics Vol 1”, Ellis Horwood, England, 1982, ISBN: 047027302X | ISBN-13:
9780470273029 36
OTT355 GARMENT MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVE:
• To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting and sewing.
• To expose the students to various problems & remedies during garment manufacturing
UNIT I PATTERN MAKING, MARKER PLANNING, CUTTING 9

Anthropometry, specification sheet, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting,
grading, marker planning, spreading & cutting
UNIT II TYPES OF SEAMS, STITCHES AND FUNCTIONS OF NEEDLES 9

Different types of seams and stitches; single needle lock stitch machine – mechanism and
accessories; needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint
UNIT III COMPONENTS AND TRIMS USED IN GARMENT 9

Sewing thread-construction, material, thread size, packages, accessories – labels, linings,
interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets
and laces, zip fasteners, buttons
UNIT IV GARMENT INSPECTION AND DIMENSIONAL CHANGES 9

Raw material, in process and final inspection; needle cutting; sewability of fabrics; strength
properties of apparel; dimensional changes in apparel due to laundering, dry-cleaning,
steaming and pressing.
UNIT V GARMENT PRESSING, PACKING AND CARE LABELING 9
Garment pressing – categories and equipment, packing; care 234abelling of apparels
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand
CO1: Pattern making, marker planning, cutting
CO2: Types of seams, stitches and functions of needles
CO3: Components and trims used in garment
CO4: Garment inspection and dimensional changes
CO5: Garment pressing, packing and care 234abelling
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science
Ltd., Oxford, 1994.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Introduction to Clothing Manufacture” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1995. 64
3. Harrison.P.W Garment Dyeing, The Textile Institute Publication, Textile Progress, Vol .19
No.2,1988.
REFERENCES:
1. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 1994
2. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985
3. Jai Prakash and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994
4. Ruth Glock, Grace I. Kunz, “Apparel Manufacturing”, Dorling Kindersley Publishing Inc.,
New Jersey, 1995.
5. Pradip V.Mehta, “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
Avg 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 1.4 0.8 1.4 1 0.2 1.8 2.4 1 1.8 2.6 1 2.6
OPE353 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the
industrial environment.
• Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other laws)
enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
• Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases, accidents /
emergencies and other hazards
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade
union safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.
UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9
Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards -
Exposure pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages
and limitations of environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of
control measures for occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and the
selection criteria - Effects on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise,
radiation and excessive stress.
UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and
colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of work
for manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels – Process
and System Safety.
UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident
investigation - Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major
accident hazard control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental
Health and Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review
– Elements of Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
• Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in occupational
setting
• Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
• What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to ensure the
protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee
OPE354 UNIT OPERATIONS IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart to the student basic knowledge on fluid mechanics, mechanical operations, heat
transfer operations and mass transfer operations.
UNIT I FLUID MECHANICS CONCEPTS

Fluid definition and classification of fluids, types of fluids, Rheological behaviour of fluids &
Newton’s Law of viscosity. Fluid statics-Pascal's law, Hydrostatic equilibrium, Barometric equation
and pressure measurement(problems),Basic equations of fluid flow - Continuity equation, Euler’s
equation and Bernoulli equation; Types of flow - laminar and turbulent; Reynolds experiment;
Flow through circular and non-circular conduits - Hagen Poiseuille equation (no derivation). Flow
through stagnant fluids – theory of Settling and Sedimentation – Equipment (cyclones, thickeners)
Conceptual numericals.
UNIT II FLOW MEASUREMENTS & MECHANICAL OPERATIONS

Different types of flow measuring devices (Orifice meter, Venturimeter, Rotameter) with
derivations, flow measurements –. Pumps – types of pumps (Centrifugal & Reciprocating pumps),
Energy calculations and characteristics of pumps. Size reduction–characteristics of comminute
products, sieve analysis, Properties and handling of particulate solids – characterization of solid
particles, average particle size, screen analysis- Conceptual numerical of differential and
cumulative analysis. Size reduction, crushing laws, working principle of ball mill. Filtration & types,
filtration equipments (plate and frame, rotary drum). Conceptual numericals.
UNIT III CONDUCTIVE & CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER

Modes of heat transfer; Conduction – steady state heat conduction through unilayer and
multilayer walls, cylinders; Insulation, critical thickness of insulation. Convection- Forced and
Natural convection, principles of heat transfer co-efficient, log mean temperature difference,
individual and overall heat transfer co-efficient, fouling factor; Condensation – film wise and drop
wise (no derivation). Heat transfer equipments – double pipe heat exchanger, shell and tube heat
exchanger (with working principle and construction with applications).
UNIT IV BASICS OF MASS TRANSFER

Diffusion-Fick’s law of diffusion. Types of diffusion. Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids at
rest and laminar flow (stagnant / unidirection and bi direction). Measurement of diffusivity, Mass
transfer coefficients and their correlations. Conceptual numerical.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS

Basic concepts of Liquid-liquid extraction – equilibrium, stage type extractors (belt extraction and
basket extraction).Distillation – Methods of distillation, distillation of binary mixtures using
McCabe Thiele method.Drying- drying operations, batch and continuous drying. Conceptual
numerical.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
• State and describe the nature and properties of the fluids.
• Study the different flow measuring instruments, the principles of various size reductions,
conveying equipment’s, sedimentation and mixing tanks.
• Comprehend the laws governing the heat and mass transfer operations to solve the
problems.
• Design the heat transfer equipment suitable for specific requirement.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Unit operations in Chemical Engineering Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith & Peter
Harriot McGraw-Hill Education (India) Edition 2014
2. Fluid Mechanics K L Kumar S Chand & Company Ltd 2008
3. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Badger W.I. and Banchero, J.T., Tata McGraw Hill
New York 1997
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Unit Operations Alan S Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L. Maus, and L.B.
Anderson John Wiley & Sons 2nd edition 2008
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Vol I &II Chattopadhyaya Khanna Publishers,
Delhi-6 1996
3. Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill International Ed
OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic
materials
• To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
• Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials
in the industry
• To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
• Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9
Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages, thermoplastic
and thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and cross-linked
structures. General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture, structure,
properties and applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE,
polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride-compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)
UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of
PET, PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins,
polyimides, PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)
UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9

Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and uses
of phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde, unsaturated
polyester resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.
UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9

Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly
(vinyl carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent
polymers- their synthesis, properties and applications
UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE, bio-
PP, bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
• Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of
various engineering thermoplastics
• To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering
thermoplastics, thermosetting resins
• Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on
polyester, epoxy, silicone and PU
• To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous areas
and applications of different biopolymers
REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press
(2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall
(2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd Edn., CRC
press (2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.
OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
• To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
• To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
• To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
• To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9

Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and
specifications. Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer products.
Preparation of test pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers:
processability parameters of rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time, cure
rate index, Processability tests carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup flow
index, gel time, bulk density, bulk factor.
UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set, dynamic
fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests: Viscoelastic
behavior (simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-Voigt model,
strain recovery and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on mechanical
properties, Behavior of reinforced polymers
UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient of
thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9

Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and
power factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-
efficient, dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties:
transparency, refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9

Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies,
Flammability tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
• Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
• Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the
polymers.
• To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
• Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
• Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and
elastomers.
REFERENCES:
1. F.Majewska, H.Zowall, Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis
Horwood Limited Publisher 1977.
2. J.F.Rabek, Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. R.P.Brown, Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons 2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer, 2010.
OEC353 VLSI DESIGN LT PC

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks
UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9

MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS devices.
MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9

Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification
of Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .
UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation
using Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.
UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder, Carry
Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
PHI, 2016.(Units II, III IV and V).
2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).
REFERENCES:
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits,
International Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology and
Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley
2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000
C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O
1 1
3 2
3 3
2 4
2 5
1 6
3 7- 8- 9- 0- 1
2 2
3 1
3 2
3 3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
C 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
O
CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
• To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
• To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9

Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional
Systems for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable
Systems, Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement
sensors, Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction
force sensor.
UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE

DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor
design, signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of
irrelevant information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human
body as a heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy
harvests, Thermopiles.
UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.
UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9

Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication Techniques-
Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive Inks.Case
study- smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9
Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients,
Elderly patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and JamilY.Khan, Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing Pte.Ltd, Singapore, 2012
REFERENCES:
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg.
CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC

30 03
PREAMBLE:
1. To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
2. This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize
the acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues ,
Computer based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information
system, Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical
Informatics, Bioinformatics
UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9

Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and
planning, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.
UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9
Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR,
Development tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical
information system, Computerized prescriptions for patients.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of
CMD, Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model,
semantic networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill
patients, Computer aids for the handicapped.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery, Surgical
simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and health-
Medical education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in medicine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
2. Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
3. Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient record
system.
4. Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
5. Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. R.D.Lele, “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill,2005
REFERENCES:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg.
OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9
Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic
wastes - Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged
fermentation – Batch and continous fermentation
UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from
biomass – Plant biomass for industrial application
UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark
and photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production -
Single stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production -
Enzymatic hydrolysis technologies
UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of
Amylases - Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases
UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in
composting - Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting,
Fundamentals of composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems –
Nonreactor Composting, Reactor composting - Compost Quality
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
1. To learn the various methods biological treatment
2. To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
3. To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
4. To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
5. To produce the biocompost from wastes
6. To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using
Fungal Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A
Practical Handbook”, CRC Press,
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural
Waste and By-Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of
Waste Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’,
Second Edition, CRC Press, 2014
OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES LTPC

3 003
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical
activity, illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases,
cancer; Prevention – Diet and exercise.
UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma
oesophagus; Causes Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment
UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9
Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol
abuse -– Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and
Cardiac rehabilitation
UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes –
Paediatric and adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI
UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth),
Smoking – Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Kumar&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep
Publications, 2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008
OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
1. Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
2. Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases
UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9

Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing
Concepts of Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public
Health, Determinants of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education,
Genetics, Food and Nutrition). Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different
disciplines in Public Health.
UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9

Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B,
Hepatitis C, HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus,
atherosclerosis, fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer
UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9

History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and
killed vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in
seed lot systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.
UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9

Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric,
neonatal units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology,
Gastroenterology, Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.
UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9

Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy –
Thermography – Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. Devlin.Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. al.Editor(s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker
VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN
CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1.To acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
2. To learn the various sources of Finance
3. To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
4. To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
5. To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9

Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.
UNIT II . SOURCES OF FINANCE 9

Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features
– Merits and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts,
Commercial Papers, Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc
UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS 9

Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital
Budgeting -– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt -
Reserves - Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of
Capital.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9

Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure –
determinants of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure. Dividend policy
- Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - -
Determinants of Dividend Policy
UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -
Determinants of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash –
Objectives and Strategies of Cash Management. Receivables Management: Objectives -
Credit policies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011
CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT LT P C

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
1. Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
2. Explain how to Value bonds and equities
3. Explain the various approaches to value securities
4. Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
5. Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.
UNITI THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT

The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of
securities, securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk,
Impact of Taxes andInflationonreturn.
UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES
Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks,
defaultrisk andcreditrating.
UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS
Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis,
dividend capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.
UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India
UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTION
Role of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection; Investor grievances and their
redressal system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill
education, 5th, Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill
Education (India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019
CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LT P C
3 003
OBJECTIVES
• Understand the Banking system in India
• Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
• Understand the development in banking technology
• Understand the financial services in India
• Understand the insurance Industry in India
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9

Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key
Regulations in Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer -
Retail & Wholesale Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.
UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - Loans.Negotiable Instruments –
Cheques, Bills of Exchange & Promissory Notes.Designing deposit schemes– Asset and
Liability Management – NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities
market
UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9

Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money –
e-money –forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in
India – RBI’s Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking
& RBI’s Initiative.
UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9

Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC ––
Leasing and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –
factoring – Merchant Banking
UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –
IRDA – Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the
Policy – revival – settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services,
Pearson, Delhi, 2017.
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and
Risk Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017
CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LT P C

3003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9
Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of
blockchain and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus:
Consensus mechanism - Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain.
Decentralization: Decentralization using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to
decentralization- Blockchain and full ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts -
Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for decentralization.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9
Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and
Payments – Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name
coin – Prime coin – Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart
contracts on a blockchain
UNIT III ETHEREUM 9

Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem -
Transactions and messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum
Virtual Machine (EVM), Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a
private net - Starting up the private network
UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9

Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks
– Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed
Ledger – Corda.
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other
Challenges – Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology,
Decentralization, and Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition,
2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”,
VPT, 2017.
CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LT P C

3 0 03
UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9
Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and
Digital Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block
chain, Artificial Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS
Systems, Immediate Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface
(UPI).Legal and Regulatory Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their
regulations.Digital Payments Smart Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments,
Payment Gateways, Mobile Payments, Digital and Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical,
Legal, Privacy, and Technology Issues
UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9

A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding,
Charity and Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering
UNIT III INSURETECH 9

InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech IoT and InsurTech
,Risk Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in
Insurance Services
UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9

P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending:
Unique opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations
UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9
FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech,
Startups: Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud
detection
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of
technology, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts,
Decentralized Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent
Pub, 2016
CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
2. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
3. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
4. To learn the Fintech developments around the world
5. To know about the future of Fintech
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure,
Banking Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future
prospects and potential issues with Fintech.
UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal
lending, P2P lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance,
Crowdfunding.
UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry-
P2P insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement
through Quote to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health
insurance.
UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India,
Africa, Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment
for Growth of FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with
FinTech companies, The new financial world.
UNIT IV FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services,
banking on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech
Supermarket, Banks partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact
on Retail Banking, A future without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology
Handbook for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on Banking
and the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial
service industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage
Publications, 2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services
Paperback, 2018
VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP L T P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
• To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
• To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in Technology
oriented businessess.
• To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.
UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9

Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-
Sociological-Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-
Basics of Managing Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and Operations
Planning – Systems Management and Administration
UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles -
Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy-
Job Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs -
Case Studies
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9
Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO
Entrepreneurship – Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global
perspectives.
TOTAL45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO 3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO 4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO 5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship
TEXT BOOKS:
1) S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi,
2021.
2) Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by Published
2019 by Cengage Learning.
REFERENCES :
1) Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
2) Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence and
Survival of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon, and
Frank Lasch. Wiley Pub.
3) Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, Ft.com.
4) David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5) HarperBusiness,https://fanny.staff.uns.ac.id/files/2013/12/Technopreneur-BASED-
EDUCATION-REVOLUTION.pdf
6) JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2009
7) Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO Inc;
M. Barcelon, UP
8) Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship
CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
• To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
• To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology oriented
businessess.
• To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business
efficiently and effectively
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9

Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams -
Self Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.
UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9

Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training and
team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building - Building
High-Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing Others - Team
Building at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9

Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and Situation
- Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and Leadership -
Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .
UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9

Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model - Situational
Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and
Transformational Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in
Organisational Leadership.
UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9

Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership -
Motivation and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management -
Negotiation and Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends in
Leadership.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO 2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
CO 4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO 5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’
REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of
experience ,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
4. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.
5. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving
team performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).
CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To develop the creativity skills among the learners
• To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
• To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
• To develeop innovative business models for business.
UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities-
Quality of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative
Environment- Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.
UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9

Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity
Training--Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our
creativity – Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities-
Strategies for Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.
UNIT III INNOVATION 9

Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product
Innovation and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators- Characteristics
of Innovation in Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity- Design Thinking and
Innovation- Innovation as Collective Change-Innovation as a system
UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial
Opportunities- Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market fit
UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9

Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models –
Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models- Responsible
Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO 3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO 4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO 5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty and
effectively
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House,
2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj
Echambadi.
CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing for
entrepreneurs
• To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing,
which they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
• To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies
and the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business owners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of
Marketing - Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern
Components of the Mix - The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.
UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9
Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and
Macro Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of
Environment Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing
Information System, Types and Components.
UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9
Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product
Strategies - Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and
Branding - Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price Decisions
- Cost Based Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing Strategies - National
and Global Pricing.
UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) -
Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity -
Personal Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning (STP)-
Logistics Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.
UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing Customer
Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in Industrial / Business
Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence Business - Services
Marketing - E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
CO 2 Understand the marketing environment
CO 3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO 4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO 5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing
issues.
REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second
edition, 2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, V.S.Ramaswamy &
S.Namakumari, Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition, 2016.
CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management for
entrepreneurs.
2. To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource
department.
3. To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9

Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager
Roles- Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting -
HR Audit - Challenges in HRM.
UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9
HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job
rotation- Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer
Applications in HR - Recent Trends
UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9

Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee Engagement.
UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and
Socialisation Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health
and Social Security Measures- Green HRM Practices
UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9

Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal
Methods – Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal - Retrenchment
- Union Management Relationship - Recent Trends
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO 1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO 2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO 3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.
REFERENCES:
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
3) David A. Decenzo, Stephen.P.Robbins, and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases , 9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012
CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop the basics of business venture financing.
• To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
• To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
• To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.
UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9
Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy, Registration
Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central and State
Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC and SIDCO.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9
Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope –
Types - Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement of
funds – Mix of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.
UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9
Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market instruments –
Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management- Fund based
Credit Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.
UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9
Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding - Private
Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding- Venture Capital.
UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9

Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors- Developing
Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation- Raising Funds -
Seed Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO 2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
CO 3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO 4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO 5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.
REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation and
Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation. Venture
Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And Ayako Yasuda,
Eds., John Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You Need
To Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital
Creates New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment
Choices And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And The
Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.
VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION L TPC

3 0 03
UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration
UNIT-II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration
UNIT-III (9)
1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach
UNIT-IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs
UNIT-V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain
Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance,
New Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.
CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3 003
UNIT- I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly
UNIT-II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy
UNIT-III (9)
1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court
UNIT-IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court
UNIT-V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; S.Chand and Company Ltd., New
Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; S.Chand & Co., New Delhi
CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems
UNIT-II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.
UNIT-III (9)
1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion
UNIT-IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission
UNIT-V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES LTPC
3 003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration as a
discipline and Identity of Public Administration
UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory
UNIT III (9)

Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics,
Organizational Design.
UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership:
Traditional and Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making
UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)
CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities:
Finance Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission,
Comptroller and Auditor General of India, Attorney General of India
UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government
UNIT III (9)

Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th
Constitutional Amendment Act 1992
UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration
UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India
CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy – Public
policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public Administration.
UNIT-II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model
UNIT-III (9)
Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy Implementation –Policy
Evaluation.
UNIT-IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups and Role of
Political Parties.
UNIT-V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy – Agriculture
policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling Publishers,
2016.
VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS
CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
• To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.
UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling techniques,
Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9
Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one sample
and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.
UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for
goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.
UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
• To understand and solve business problems
• To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
• To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business environments
• To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.
REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood H.Siddiqui, Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition
2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas A.Williams, Jeffrey D.Camm, James
6. Cochran, Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia,
Singapore, 2016.
7. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
• To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making.
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.
UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9

Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures
UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification, Association, Clustering.
UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different domains.
2. Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
3. Apply various prediction techniques.
4. Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
5. Develop and implement machine learning algorithms
REFERENCES:
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann
Publishers 2006
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.
CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned with
the overall business strategy.
• To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
• To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
• To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9

People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business – HR
metrics and KPIs.
UNIT II HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9

Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee referral
hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.
UNIT III HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally trained -
Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.
UNIT IV HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover- grades,
performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics: Promotion index -
Rotation index - Career path index.
UNIT V - HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age profiling -
Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work settings.
• The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.
REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR Metric.London: Kogan
Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics ,Understanding Theories and
Applications, SAGE Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. , Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo selection,
developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New Jersey: Pearson
Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and Optimize
Your Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of Human
Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill,2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.
CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social media
UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9

Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping, Data
Exploration, Market Basket Analysis
UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9

History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using
Social Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media Pages-
Linking Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.
UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.
UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning, Critical
Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data Analysis.
UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic analysis,
online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their
potential impact.
REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private
Limited, 2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016
CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and methods in
operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the latest developments in the
field.
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics, transforming
supply chains.
UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9

P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models, Space
Determination and Layout Methods.
UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9

Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system and LIMIT,
Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.
UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9

Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation Problems,
Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem, Scheduling Algorithms.
UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an Techniques,
the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of certainty, risk
and uncertainty.
REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network Design:
Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time:
Supply Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan, Arunachalam
Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in
Operations/Supply Chain Management , I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.
CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
• This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target finance
applications.
UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of capital,
Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.
UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9

Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time series-
examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.
UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial model
for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.
UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle charts,
simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.
UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9

Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit risk
model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
• The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using excel,
Python and R.
REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013 by
Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11 Sep
2017 by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.
VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY
CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
• To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices and to
understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction, maintenance and
decommissioning of infrastructure projects.
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9

Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development goals
(SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and Development
linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators - Performance indicators of
sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and practices: global and Indian –
Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle - Constraints and barriers for
sustainable development - future directions.
UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9
Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and port
transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), Land
acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost effectiveness
Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic, demand, political,
socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of Infrastructure Projects to
mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with multiple Stakeholders on
Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated planning - Clash detection in
construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information technology –
Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based Management
System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management, precision control and real
time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction – Data management
for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource efficiency benefits of effective logistics -
Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design considerations, Design Parameters and Procedures –
Quality control and Assurance - Use of sustainable construction techniques: Precast concrete
technology, Pre-engineered buildings.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9

Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement concrete
- Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable consumption –
Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green engineering - Extended
producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies, Practices, Guidelines, Methods, And
Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly - Dematerialization, rematerialization,
transmaterialization – Green procurement and green distribution - Analysis framework for reuse and
recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and recycling - Communication of Life Cycle Information -
Indian Eco mark scheme - Environmental product declarations – Environmental marketing- Life cycle
Analysis (LCA), Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA, Thermodynamic LCA - Extending LCA - economic
dimension, social dimension - Life cycle costing (LCC) - Combining LCA and LCC – Case studies
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An Integrated
Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information Technology and
Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health Monitoring for Infrastructure
projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities - Capacity Building and
Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure Implementation, Infrastructure Management
Systems and Future Directions. – Use of Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data Analytics and Cloud
Computing, Artificial Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth Generation (5G) Network
services for maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.
CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition ,
Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee Publication Pvt.
Ltd, 2016.
5. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
8. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”, SPRINGER,
2022.
9. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
10. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and Sustainability:
International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook - General guide for Life Cycle
Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European Union;2010
11. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
12. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering Tomorrow's
Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce the
concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of sustainable
agricultural systems for a changing world.
UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE

CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes - Ecological
services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food systems - Defining
sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference between regenerative and
sustainable agriculture systems
UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9
Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of healthy
soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil - Management
practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest and disease control
UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9
Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the productivity of
water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced irrigation systems and
agricultural practices for sustainable water use
UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials produced
using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for sustainable agriculture
UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9
Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability -
Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production - Goals and
components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of sustainable
agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological use of
resources
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in non-
sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to a
sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem
REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future of
Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020
2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N., Springer, 2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E., Springer,
2016
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC Press,
2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press, 2014
CO – PO Mapping - SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE PRACTICES

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation
CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
• To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
• To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
• To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
• To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
• To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9
Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials- Biocompatibility-
Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and porous materials-Bonding
types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface properties and adhesion of
materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-tissue response to implants- Impact
and Future of Biomaterials
UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9

Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–Types of
polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric biomaterials -Polyethylene
-Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and polyglycolic acid (PGA) -Polycaprolactone
(PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –Polyurethan- reactions polymers for medical purposes -
Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes and their biological
applications
UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9

General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon- Calcium
phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical Composites-
Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix Composite (MMC)–
glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds
UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9

Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium alloys-
Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-surface properties of
metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of metallic implants – biological
tolerance of implant metals
UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of nanosize-
nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-Nanosurface and
coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics- BioNEMs -Biosensor-
Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their importance.
• Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
• Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite materials
• Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
• Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical applications.
REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to Biomaterials
Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press, 2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, R.S.Lakes “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. M.Jaffe,W.Hammond, P.Tolias and T.Arinzeh “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood head
publishing, 2013.
5. Buddy D.Ratner and Allan S.Hoffman Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to Material in
Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and Biomaterials:
Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional Bionanomaterials”
springer, 2020.
9. Sujata.V.Bhat Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.
CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
• To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
• To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials used.
• To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
• To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic application
• To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind, solar
etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials for sustainable
electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally available materials –
Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal plants – Nuclear energy
UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary battery
(Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel Metal Hydride)
– Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery (Anode materials –
Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium Titanate) (Cathode
Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion battery (ethylene carbonate
and propylene carbonate based)
UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells, alkaline
fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel cells, solid oxide
fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell – Fuel utilization –
electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts ( Platinum, Platinum
alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported platinum catalysts) – Anatomy
of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate, current conductors, bipolar plates and
monopolar plates).
UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of Si and
wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon solar cells –
multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic concentrators –
Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar cells – Perovskite solar
cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials used in solar cells ( metallic
oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled carbon nanotubes, two-dimensional
Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells materials - copper-phthalocyanine and
perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes - boron subphthalocyanine- tin (II) phthalocyanine)
UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo capacitors
and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-parameters of
supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials (transition metal
oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes, nanocarbons, non-noble metal,
chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame work (MOF), activated carbon fibres
(ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI), a ternary hybrid composite- conductive
polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of nanocomposites for the SC electrodes (carbon–carbon
composites, carbon-MOs composites, carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs composites) - Two-
Dimensional (2D) Electrode Materials - 2D transition metal carbides, carbonitrides, and nitrides.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
• Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.
• Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
• Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
• The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the performance of
various materials
REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J. Skinner,
Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold Lamm,
Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and technological
applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; B.Viswanathan. M.Aulice Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia Forouzandeh,
Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature solid
oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative materialistic
development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today: Proceedings, 2022.
CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
• To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology and
efficiency, and sustainability.
• To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9

Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and green
engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass efficiency, and other
green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic plans.
UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types of waste,
chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.
UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids, water as a
reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono chemical methods,
microwave-assisted reactions
UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design –
Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer chemistry for
accident prevention
UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential substitutes
for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5 – To understand advanced technology in green synthesis
TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly, Taylor &
Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC,2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) , Wiley publications,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017
CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• to understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants generated
due to industrial activity.
• To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the purpose
of environmental risk assessment.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards- water
quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring- Concepts of
environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.
UNIT II MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling - sampling
of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.
UNIT III ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric methods
-Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in sewage; Biochemical
oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution measurements; analysis of particulates
and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of sulfur, carbon monoxide, hydrocarbon; Introduction
to advanced instruments for environmental analysis
UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) & RISKASSESSMENT 9

Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for National
Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard identification-
exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.
UNIT V AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9

Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online Data
Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System - Review of
Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers- data acquisition
system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality control; regulatory overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know
CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.
CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability
of the environment.
CO5 the various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the
environment.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and soild
wastes / Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc
REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX
Course Program Outcomes

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -
CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
2. To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
3. Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
4. Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies for
attaining sustainable development
5. Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development
UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing – Energy
security
UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9
Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) -
Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty. Globalization and
Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and growth.
UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind, Hydro,
Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits
UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity Authority -
National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan, RE integration,
Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
2. Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
3. Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
4. Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
5. Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-ea.org/gbook1.asp,
a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory body under Ministry
of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University Press,
2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
7. https://www.niti.gov.in/verticals/energy
CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental implications
of energy utilisation
2. To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
3. To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
4. To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical utilities
5. To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage
UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production and
consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP
UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9

Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy costs,
bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing system
efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution, energy audit
instruments
UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9

Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid Heaters.
Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator, regenerator, heat
pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and thermocompression
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers - Energy
conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors, illumination systems
and cooling towers
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG).
Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and
growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty,
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the prevailing energy scenario
2. Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
3. Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
4. Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
5. Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-ea.org/gbook1.asp,
a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory body under Ministry
of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”, 4th
Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report prepared by
TERI for MoEF, 2011.

B.E.Marine 2024 (3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.E.Marine 2024 (3)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.E.Marine 2024 (3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

NON-AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY

B.E. MARINE ENGINEERING

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs):

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs):

PEO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

$ Skill Based Course

*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies

Sl. Course Contact Periods Per Week

8hrs per day – 6 days

TOTAL CREDITS: 177

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

MANDATORY COURSES II*

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

*Mandatory Courses are offered as Non-Credit courses

Advanced Marine Heat Engines Marine Vehicles Underwater Vehicles

Marine Engineering Thermodynamics Fuel Cell Technologies Offshore Technology

Refer to the Regulations 2021, Clause 6.3. (Amended on 27.07.2023)

VERTICAL 1: DIVERSIFIED COURSES GROUP 1

Sl. Course Cate Periods Total

VERTICAL 2: DIVERSIFIED COURSES GROUP 2

Sl. Course Cate Periods Total

VERTICAL 3: DIVERSIFIED COURSES GROUP 3

Sl. Course Cate Periods Total

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

OPEN ELECTIVES – III

Subject Area Credits per Semester Total

Financial Foundations of Principles of Public Statistics for Sustainable

Banking, Creativity & Innovation Public Personnel Human Sustainable Bio

Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation and Green Technology

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

(i) Physical Activity

(ii) Creative Arts

(iii) Universal Human Values

(iv) Literary Activity

(v) Proficiency Modules

(vi) Lectures by Eminent People

(vii) Visits to Local Area

(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

(ix) Department Specific Activities

HS3101 TECHNICAL ENGLISH FOR MARINE ENGINEERS – I L T P C

MA3101 MATHEMATICS FOR MARINE ENGINEERING – I L T P C

UNIT I THREE DIMENSIONAL ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY 12

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

CY3101 CHEMISTRY FOR MARINE ENGINEERING L T P C

UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

UNIT II CHEMISTRY OF CORROSION 9

UNIT III CORROSION CONTROL METHODS 9

GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3